HT64-132 HSINC-50完工资料

Final Document
完工资料
Marine Incinerator
船用焚烧炉
Model: HSINC-50
FOR
江苏韩通船舶重工有限公司
64000T 散货船
Hull No.:HT64-132
M325
Version ( A.0 )
2014.02.24
Date: 2012-03 INCINERATOR
Rev: V1.4 HSINC-50
CONTENTS 目录
Chapter 1 Overall System Introduction系统简介.................................................................... 3
Chapter 2 Main data and Scope of Supply 主要参数及供货范围......................................... 4
2.1 Incinerator 焚烧炉.................................................................................................................................... 4
2.2 Burner 燃烧器(on incinerator unit 安装在焚烧炉上)........................................................................ 4
2.3 Flue gas fan 烟气风机............................................................................................................................ 4
2.4 Flue gas damper 烟气风门.................................................................................................................... 5
2.5 Sludge tank 污油柜.................................................................................................................................. 5
2.6 Sludge circulation pump 污油循环泵................................................................................................. 5
2.7 Sludge dosing pump 污油计量泵......................................................................................................... 5
2.8 Electrical control panel 电控箱............................................................................................................ 6
2.9 Expansion Bellow 膨胀节....................................................................................................................... 6
Chapter 3 Operator panel introductions人机界面操作说明.................................................. 7
3.1. General description 概述................................................................................................................. 7
3.2. Manu tree 菜单结构............................................................................................................................. 7
3.3. Interface operation guidance 操作界面详细说明......................................................................... 7
3.3.1. Language selection upon power-on 上电语言选择.................................................................... 7
3.3.2. Flow diagram 流程图................................................................................................................. 8
3.3.3. Main manu 主菜单.................................................................................................................... 11
3.3.4. Operation page 操作页面......................................................................................................... 11
3.3.5. Chart of trend 趋势图............................................................................................................... 15
3.3.6. Alarm page 报警页面............................................................................................................... 16
3.3.7. Alarm history record 报警历史记录........................................................................................ 16
3.3.8. Data setting 参数设置............................................................................................................... 17
3.4. Alarm 报警系统.................................................................................................................................. 25
3.4.1. General description 概述.......................................................................................................... 25
3.4.2. Alarm list 报警内容.................................................................................................................. 26
3.5. Function description 功能描述...................................................................................................... 30
3.5.1. General description 概述.......................................................................................................... 30
3.5.2. Solid operation description 固体垃圾焚烧操作说明............................................................... 32
3.5.3. Sludge mode operation 污油焚烧操作说明............................................................................. 35
3.5.4. Solid + Sludge oil mode 固体垃圾+污油模式......................................................................... 37
3.5.5. communication protocol with computer station 与上位机的通讯协议................................... 38
3.6. Operation 日常操作.......................................................................................................................... 43
3.6.1. Sludge burning 污油焚烧......................................................................................................... 43
3.6.2. Solid + sludge 固体垃圾+污油焚烧......................................................................................... 46
3.6.3. Emergency stop 应急停机........................................................................................................ 46
3.7 Incinerator burner operating insrucions 燃烧器风门调节说明 .................................................49
Chapter 4 Control system hardware descriptions控制系统硬件说明.................................51
4.1 Control System Input/Output Signal Configuration 控制系统输入 / 输出信号清单.............. 51
4.1.1 Input signal 输入信号..................................................................................................................... 51
Page 2 of 188
Rev: V1.4 HSINC-50

4.1.2 Output signal 输出信号.................................................................................................................. 51
4.2 Description of Electronic and Electric Elements 电气主要元件说明......................................... 54
Chapter 6 Maintenance instruction 维护................................................................................57
6.1. Preventive maintenance 维护....................................................................................................... 57
6.1.1. Daily 每天................................................................................................................................ 57
6.1.2. Weekly 每周............................................................................................................................. 57
6.1.3. Monthly 每月........................................................................................................................... 57
6.1.4. Yearly 每年.............................................................................................................................. 57
6.2. Inspection 检查................................................................................................................................ 58
6.3. Cleaning and lubrication 清洗和润滑.......................................................................................... 59
Chapter 7 Frequency Inverter Parameters Set变频器参数设置........................................ 60
7.1. Parameters set list for incinerator 跟焚烧炉设备有关的变频器参数列表.............................. 60
APPENDLX A FLOW DRAWING 流程图………………………………………………...…62
APPENDLX B MECHANICAL DRAWING 机械图........................................................64
APPENDLX C ELECTRIC DRAWING 电气图..............................................................72
APPENDLX D STANDARD SPARE PARTS FOR HSINC-50……………………………77
APPENDLX E OTHERS …….………………………………..……………………………78
Page 3 of 188
Rev: V1.4 HSINC-50
Chapter 1 Overall System Introduction 系统简介

The Hansun marine Incinerator type HSINC-50, which is designed for on board incineration of
ship’s waste oil and solid, it mainly consists of four parts:
汉盛 HSINC-50 焚烧炉主要用于焚烧船上的固体垃圾和污油，主要由以下四部分组成：
a. Combustion chamber with diesel oil burner, sludge burner, and electric control panel.
焚烧炉炉体（附带可以燃烧轻柴油和污油的燃烧器，电气控制柜）
b. Flue gas fan 烟气风机
c. Flue gas damper. 烟道风门
d. Sludge tank with circulating pump and heater. 带循环泵和加热器的污油柜。
The incinerator HSINC-50 is equipped with two doors in front ,which are intended for loading
of solid waste and ash removing, the incinerator in stand-by mode (Com.Tem. less than 220℃), the
doors can be opened properly. If the incinerator is running in cooling down mode, the door can be
opened till Com.Tem. less than 100℃ and incinerator fully stop.
在焚烧炉的正面装有 2 个门，用来向炉内装固体垃圾和清除炉灰的。只有焚烧炉停机后
且温度在 220℃以下可以打开炉门，如在运行状态下，焚烧炉需冷却至 100℃以下停机后方可
以打开炉门。
The electrical control panel is installed on the incinerator and it contains fuses, starters, PLC
and operator panel. The electric panel is built according to international standards for marine
equipment. The operator panel which is located at the right side of the control panel has a touch
screen and defined keys for system starting /stopping and selecting burner modes.
电气控制柜安装在焚烧炉的燃烧器一侧，主要有 PLC、保险丝和人机界面组成。电气柜完
全是按照国际船用电气的标准来设计的。带触摸的人机界面安装在控制柜的侧面，有 6 个预
定义的按键，可以用来选择燃烧方式和启动/停止系统。
The burning process is controlled by the PLC and monitored by the HMI(Human Machine
Interface) and scanned by a photo resistor. The combustion chamber temperatures are also regulated
automatically by the PLC control system.
整个燃烧过程由 PLC 自动控制并由人机界面监视，并安装有火焰探测器进行燃烧时火焰
的检测，燃烧时炉膛温度也由 PLC 自动控制。
Page 4 of 188
Rev: V1.4 HSINC-50
Chapter 2 Main data and Scope of Supply 主要参数及供货范围

2.1 Incinerator 焚烧炉
Type HSINC-50
Capacity 容量 500,000 kcal/h (580KW)
63 kg/h IMO sludge oil IMO sludge (20% water
60 kg/charge solid waste content)
IMO class 02 solid waste
Combustion chamber Max.最大 1180 C
temperature 燃烧室温度 Working 工作 850-1150 C
Flue gas temperature Max. 最大 375 C
烟气温度 Working 工作 250-340 C
Surface temperature 外 Less than ambient temperature
表温度 +20 C , and less than 60℃
低于环境温度+20℃,小于 60℃
Electrical power 12kW
Consumption 消耗功率
Negative pressure 炉膛 5-35 mm WC Negative pressure in
负压 combustion chamber
Total weight 总重 2900 kg
Outline dimension See dimension drawing
外形尺寸 (APPENDIX)
2.2 Burner 燃烧器(on incinerator unit 安装在焚烧炉上)

Type 型号 HY03C.H
Capacity 容量 18 ~28 l/h Two nozzles 两个喷嘴.
3.0gph ,5.0 gph
Oil pump 油泵 Working pressure 工作压力 16 bar
Max 最大 21 bar.
El. Motor 马达 440V, 60Hz,1.1kW,IP54,F
3360 rpm.
Ignition transformer 220V/15,000V
点火变压器
Weight 重量 50 kg
2.3 Flue gas fan 烟气风机

Type 型号 JCL45C
Capacity 容量 9500 Nm3/hr
El. Motor 马达 440V, 60Hz,7.5kW,
3520 rpm.IP54,F
Page 5 of 188
Rev: V1.4 HSINC-50

Weight 重量 320kg
2.4 Flue gas damper 烟气风门

Type 型式 Flange damper with actuator
带执行器的焊接法兰风门
Size 尺寸 DN 400/350
Actuator motor SIEMENS Drive force 20Nm.
执行器 Travel time for 90 is 150 sec.
Weght 重量 60kg
Dimension between See dimension drawing
298 mm
flanges 法兰间距 (APPENDIX)
2.5 Sludge tank 污油柜

Volume 容积 Net：1000L
Flange rating 法兰 PN 0.6
Weight 重量 Abt.650 kg
Heat form ■steam Heating 蒸汽加热
加热形式
2.6 Sludge circulation pump 污油循环泵

Type 型号 2PWF11B
Capacity 容量 20 m3/h @0.11 MPa
El. Motor 马达 440V, 60Hz,2.2kW ， IP54 ， F,
3450 rpm
Weight 重量 42 kg
Connections Suction: DN 65, PN0.6 Flange: GB569-65
接口尺寸 Discharge: DN 32, PN0.6
2.7 Sludge dosing pump 污油计量泵

Type 型号 A frequency controlled screw pump for MONO,UK
quantity control of sludge.
变频器控制的螺杆泵
El. Motor 马达 3x220V, 50/60Hz, 0.37 kW,IP54,F,
1500 rpm
Control speed
150～1500RPM
转速
Page 6 of 188
Rev: V1.4 HSINC-50
2.8 Electrical control panel 电控箱

Enclosure rating IP 44
防护等级
外型尺寸 (APPENDIX)
2.9 Expansion Bellow 膨胀节

Remark
Item 部件 Description 描述 Deformation 变形量
备注
Expansion Bellow 1 set Expansion bellow 轴向总位移ΔX≤35
膨胀节 DN350 (two pcs) Axial displacement ΔX≤35
1 套膨胀节（ 1 套两径向总位移Δy≤15
只） radial total displacementΔy≤15
Page 7 of 188
Rev: V1.4 HSINC-50
Chapter 3 Operator panel introductions 人机界面操作说明
3.1. General description 概述

Incinerator HSINC-50 has PLC control module, which of them mainly comprise of PLC
module, digit input and output module, A/D input/output module, touch panel (HMI). The
system operation can be carried out on HMI, there are 5 key aside HMI for easy operation.
INC50 由一套 PLC 控制系统工作，核心控制部件包括 PLC 主机、开关量输入/输出扩展模
块、模拟量输入/输出扩展模块、触摸屏（HMI）。主要的控制功能都是通过触摸屏来实现，
触摸屏上有 5 个功能键，使操作更加方便快捷。
3.2. Manu tree 菜单结构
Picture1
3.3. Interface operation guidance 操作界面详细说明
3.3.1. Language selection upon power-on 上电语言选择

There would be a language selection page flashing out upon system power-on, user can confirm
preferred language by pressing certain key. If no such operation by user within 5 seconds,
system will follow up default language of latest operation. Software and hardware version are
available on page bottom with latest updating date.
每次上电后都会跳出一个页面要求用户选择语言，用户可以根据需要按相应的按钮进行选
择，如果 5 秒钟内没有经行选择，上一次选择将会生效。页面下部标注有软件及对应的硬
件版本号，以及最后修改的时间。
Page 8 of 188
Rev: V1.4 HSINC-50
Picture2
3.3.2. Flow diagram 流程图
Picture3
3.3.2.1. Flue gas fan with flue gas temperature: The flue gas fan symbol flashed in green while it’s
running.
烟气风机及烟气温度：烟气风机运行时显示为绿色。
3.3.2.2. Flue gas damper with operation status: “Open” flashing means damper opening, “Close”
flashing means damper closing. No moving stands for no displaying.
烟气风门及动作状态：烟气风门正在打开时显示打开，正在关闭时显示关闭，停止时
没有显示。
3.3.2.3. Diesel oil solenoid valve of burner: Flashing in green while solenoid valve is on.
燃烧器的柴油电磁阀：打开时显示为绿色。
3.3.2.4. Diesel oil pump: Flashing in green while burner is on.
燃烧器柴油泵：燃烧器运转时显示为绿色。
3.3.2.5. Flame, combustion temperature, vacuum in combustion chamber: The flame symbol
flashing while incinerator is running, there are vacuum in mmWC and combustion
temperature in ℃ available below the symbol of combustion chamber.
炉膛火焰指示和炉膛温度、真空度：当火焰传感器检测到火焰时代表炉膛的矩形下部
会有火焰图案闪动。火焰图案下方的两个数字分别是炉膛压力（负压表示为负数，单
位是毫米水柱）和炉膛温度。
Page 9 of 188
Rev: V1.4 HSINC-50

3.3.2.6. Compressed air solenoid valve: intended for sludge oil accompany-dosing with compressed
air, flashing in green while it’s on, intended for driving one sludge oil pneumatic valve.
压缩空气电磁阀：用于控制污油雾化空气，打开时显示为绿色，同时雾化空气还控制
一个气动污油阀。
3.3.2.7. Sludge oil circulation pump: intended for macerating and boosting for sludge oil supply to
incinerator, it gives fine mixing of oil and water, flashing in green while it’s on.
污油循环泵：用于将污油中的各种成分混合好，运行时显示为绿色。
3.3.2.8. Sludge oil dosing pump with frequency and sludge oil temperature indication: Sludge oil
dosing pump regulating under frequency converter, flashing in green while it’s on. The
sludge temperature sensor fitted beside dosing pump.
污油计量泵及其频率和污油温度：污油计量泵的转速受变频器控制，运行时显示为绿
色；污油温度传感器安装在污油计量泵旁边。
3.3.2.9. Sludge oil tank: flashing in blue while level in normal, flashing in red while level less than
10%.
污油污油柜：液位正常时颜色显示为蓝色，污油柜液位低时，液位显示为约 10%，并
显示为红色。
3.3.2.10. Sludge oil heater: flashing in green while heating.
污油加热器：加热时显示为绿色。
3.3.2.11. Pneumatic sludge oil valve: driven by compressed air, flashing in green while it’s on. 气动
污油阀：受雾化空气控制，打开时显示为绿色。
3.3.2.12. Igniting indication: flashing with symbol of “thunder” while it’s on.
点火变压器指示：当点火变压器工作时，画面显示一个“闪电”图标。
3.3.2.13. Burning time: burning time displaying.
燃烧时间：当前操作燃烧的时间。
3.3.2.14. Remaining time: if preset burning time, it displays remaining burning time, then system
will automatically stop upon preset time. If no preset time, it displays as “0”.
剩余时间：如果预设了燃烧时间，预设时间达到时自动停机，则显示剩余的燃烧时间；
如果没有预设燃烧时间（设定为 0），则显示为 0。
3.3.2.15. Current operation mode and statue: intended for displaying current system running mode
and status, if any alarm or not. It includes displaying as follow:
当前工作模式：用于显示当前的模式选择及是否有报警存在，包括如下内容：
z Sludge oil mode: means current burning mode in sludge.
污油模式：当前工作模式选择了污油焚烧。
z Solid mode: means current operation mode in solid
固体垃圾模式：当前工作模式选择了垃圾焚烧模式。
z Solid + sludge: means current operation mode in solid + sludge, the incineration perfumes
solid burning first, and turns to sludge burning mode if there is insufficient heat during
solid burning.
固体垃圾+污油模式：当前工作模式选择了固体垃圾加污油模式，焚烧时首先执行固
体垃圾焚烧程序，如果垃圾热量不足则自动转换到污油焚烧模式
z Alarm: means interchanging display between current operation status and alarm if any
alarm occurs.
Page 10 of 188
Rev: V1.4 HSINC-50

报警：如果存在报警，画面文字将不停地切换显示当前工作模式和“报警”
z Warning: means interchanging display between current operation status and warn if any
warning occur, i.e battery voltage low.
警告：如果存在警告（电池低压），画面文字将不停地切换显示当前的工作模式和“警
告”。
3.3.2.16. Current status description: intended for describing current working status, mainly as
follow:
当前动作描述：说明当前正在执行的程序，包括如下内容：
z Stand-by: system in stand-by mode
待机：系统处于停止状态。
z Manual operation of circulating pump / sludge heater: manually starts sludge circulation
pump, sludge heater. The sludge heating shuts down automatically upon temperature
exceeding setting of thermal switch of sludge tank, and no start-up even setting lowers
down to setting. Meanwhile the circulating pump and sludge heating will stop
automatically upon low level switch activated, and no start-up even level return to normal.
手动操作循环泵/污油加热器：手动起动了污油循环泵、污油加热器。污油温度超过
污油柜温度开关设定值后将会自动停止加热，并且温度降低后也不会再自动起动加热
器。如果出现了污油液位低，污油循环泵和污油加热器都会自动停止，并且在液位正
常后也不会再自动起动。
z Sludge heating: Sludge mode or Sludge + Solid mode, the circulating pump and sludge
heater will start-up automatically, and to be regulated till temperature setting of sludge tank
or exceeding 5℃ of temperature low alarm setting of sludge in program. After that the
incinerator will step into pre-purge program.
污油加热：如果选择了污油或污油+固体垃圾模式，系统起动后将自动起动污油循环
泵和污油加热器，直到温度超过污油柜温度开关设定值或者超过污油低温报警设定值
5 度以上。然后自动转入执行前扫风程序。
z Pre-purge: The incinerator will carry out pre-purging, and expel combustible gas within no
less than 15 seconds.
前扫风：在点火前将炉膛内可能存在的可燃气体排出，时间不小于 15 秒
z Ignition: If incinerator detecting flame before ignition, the system HMI will flash out page
for user confirmation, once user confirmed, the system will turn-on igniting transformer,
the diesel oil solenoid valve open.
点火：如果炉膛内有火焰，将会提示并要求确认。然后点火变压器送电、柴油电磁阀
打开，如果点火成果将根据工作模式的选择分别执行固体垃圾焚烧或污油焚烧程序。
z Combustion chamber heating: close burner damper, and increase combustion chamber
temperature.
燃烧室加热：燃烧器风门关小，尽快提高炉膛温度。
z Sludge oil mode: Sludge oil mode burning as per program
污油焚烧：按照预定程序焚烧污油。
z Solid mode: Solid mode burning as per program
固体垃圾焚烧：按照预定程序焚烧固体垃圾。
z Post-purging: expel combustible gas in combustion chamber within time delay not less than
Page 11 of 188
Rev: V1.4 HSINC-50

30 seconds.
后扫风：将炉膛内的可能存在的可燃气体排出，时间不小于 30 秒。
z Cooling down: cooling down the incinerator till temperature less than pre-setting, then
system return to stand-by mode.
冷却：将炉膛冷却到预定温度以下，然后回到待机状态。
z Slag mode: the incinerator will close burner damper, then start-up flue gas fan upon certain
time delay, after that user can open door and remove slag.
出灰：系统关闭烟气风门，经过一定延时后起动烟气风机，此时可以人工将炉膛内的
残灰清除。
3.3.3. Main manu 主菜单

Including function key as follow:
包括如下功能键
Picture4
z Flow diagram: skip to flow diagram page
流程图：跳转到流程图。
z Operation page: skip to operation page for selecting working mode, start or stop system.
操作页面：跳转到操作页面，可以执行选择工作模式、起动、停止等动作。
z Parameter setting: skip to parameter setting page
参数设置：跳转到参数设置页面。
z Trend page: skip to trend page
趋势图：可以查看炉膛温度、烟气温度、炉膛真空度的趋势图。
z Alarm page: display current alarm status
报警页面：显示当前报警项目的状态。
z Alarm record: history alarm record
报警记录：显示报警的历史记录。
3.3.4. Operation page 操作页面

Operation page mainly include as follow
操作页面主要包括如下内容
Page 12 of 188
Rev: V1.4 HSINC-50
Picture5
3.3.4.1. Burning mode:
燃烧模式选择：
z Solid mode: solid burning mode button, indication turns green upon button pressed.
固体垃圾：固体垃圾模式选择按钮，固体垃圾模式选择指示变绿色
z Sludge oil mode: sludge oil mode button, indication turns green upon button pressed.
污油：污油模式选择按钮，污油模式选择指示变绿色
z Solid and sludge mode: solid + sludge mode button, solid and sludge mode indication turns
green upon button pressed.
固体垃圾和污油：固体垃圾+污油模式选择按钮，固体垃圾模式选择指示和污油模式
选择指示同时变绿。如果在一秒钟内连续按“固体垃圾”和“污油”两个按钮等同于按“固
体垃圾和污油”按钮
3.3.4.2. Preset burning time: the parameter can be set at 0~9999, unit in minute, them system will
automatically stop upon preset time, then setting return to 0. If such setting at 0, that means
function of “system automatic shut-down” cancelled, this mode also available to sludge oil
burning mode.
预设燃烧时间：可以输入一个 0-9999 的数字，单位分钟，在焚烧时间达到该设定值
后自动停机，设定值归零。如果该设定值为 0，则定时停机的功能被取消。可用于控
制固体垃圾焚烧，达到预设时间后自动停机，当然也可用于污油焚烧。
3.3.4.3. Information: display certain information for attention, main details as follow:
信息提示：显示一些与当前状态相关的提示信息，包括如下内容。
z In stand-by status, display as “enable to open loading or slag door for loading or ash
removal, enable to open sludge circulating pump and sludge heating”
在待机状态下显示“可以打开炉门装填或出灰，允许手动打开污油泵和加热器”
z In slag status, display as “enable to slag remove, stop flue gas fan by pressing of “stop”
button.
在出灰状态下显示“现在可以出灰，按‘停止’按钮可停止烟气风扇”
z In system running status, display as “no permitting to open door when combustion
temperature exceed 220℃ during system running.
在系统运行状态下显示“当系统运行时或炉膛温度超过 220 度时不允许打开炉门”
3.3.4.4. Current parameter indication: display current parameter in turn
当前参数显示：依次循环显示如下内容。
z Combustion chamber temperature
燃烧室温度
Page 13 of 188
Rev: V1.4 HSINC-50

z Combustion chamber vacuum
燃烧室真空度
z Flue gas temperature
烟气温度
z Sludge oil temperature
污油温度
z Sludge dosing pump frequency
污油泵计量泵频率
3.3.4.5. Button of “sludge oil heating”, manually open and stop sludge heating, this is the
interchangeable button, the button turns green upon sludge heating “on” and turns grey
upon sludge heating “off”. The manual start-up function is to be cancelled automatically as
per certain status as follows.
“污油加热器”按钮，用于手动起动污油加热器，是一个交替开关，污油加热器起动时
显示绿色，停止时显示灰色。在如下条件下污油加热器手动起动信号自动取消。
z System running in “Sludge or solid + sludge” mode, except post purge and cooling down.
在污油或固体垃圾+污油模式下起动并运行焚烧炉，后扫风和冷却阶段除外。
z Sludge oil low level
污油柜液位低
z Sludge oil temperature reaches setting point on sludge oil tank
污油温度达到污油柜温度开关设定值
z Manually start-up sludge heating by pressing of “stop” in stand-by mode.
在待机状态下手动起动污油加热器后，按“停止”按钮
3.3.4.6. “Sludge circulating” button, which intended for manually start or stop sludge circulating
pump, this is a interchangeable button, the indication turns green upon pump start-up, and
turns grey upon pump shut-off. The manual start-up function is to be cancelled
automatically as per certain status as follows
“污油循环泵”按钮，由于手动起动污油循环泵，是一个交替开关，污油循环泵起动后
显示绿色，停止后显示灰色。在如下条件下污油循环泵的手动起动信号自动取消。
z System running in “Sludge or solid + sludge” mode, except post purge and cooling down.
在污油或固体垃圾+污油模式下起动并运行焚烧炉，后扫风和冷却阶段除外。
z Sludge oil low level
污油柜液位低
z Manually start-up sludge circulating pump by pressing of “stop” in stand-by mode.
在待机状态下手动起动污油循环泵后，按“停止”按钮
3.3.4.7. “open/slag” button, display “open” when door closed; display “slag”
“开门/出灰”按钮，在炉门关闭的情况下按钮文字显示“开门”；在炉门打开后按钮文字
显示“出灰”。
z “Open door” key: the door can be open upon combustion chamber temperature less than
setting or system in stand-by. There is a status feedback available on door locker, if door
open or start incinerator under door open, the incinerator is to be inhibited to start-up or
shut-down immediately. Upon key “Open door” pressed during system in stand-by mode,
then the door can be opened. And door locker to be secured upon door closed again. If key
Page 14 of 188
Rev: V1.4 HSINC-50

“Open door” pressed without opening door, the door locker to be secured upon 10s time
delay.
“开门”按钮：炉门只有在系统停机，并且炉膛温度低于开门温度设定值时才可以打开。
门锁有一个状态反馈，在开门的情况下不能起动焚烧炉，起动后如果检测到炉门打开
会马上停机。在合适的条件下按“开门”按钮，门锁打开，即可手动打开炉门，关闭炉
门后，炉门立刻被锁定，如果按下“开门”按钮却没有去开炉门，10 秒后炉门重新被
锁定。
z “Slag” key: in order to avoiding ashes insufflating outside, the incinerator will close
damper in first, then start flue gas fan after time delay, the suspending ashes will be blew
out by flue gas fan. Picture 6 will flash out upon key “slag” pressed, confirm “slag”
procedure by pressing key “Yes”, or cancel “slag” procedure by pressing key “No” and
return to normal operation page.
“出灰”按钮：出灰时为了防止炉灰在机舱内飘散，所以要执行关烟气风门动作，经过
延时后，起动烟气风机，飘散的炉灰被烟气风机排出。按“出灰”按钮后会跳出一个要
求确认的页面（图 6），按“确认”即可执行出灰程序。按“取消”即可返回操作页面。
Picture6
3.3.4.8. Key of “Start”: start up incinerator according to working mode selected. Detail condition as
follow:
z Door of incinerator closed
z If mode “Sludge” or “Solid + Sludge” mode selected, the sludge oil level must exceed low
level switch.
z No alarm, (start up incinerator even though flue gas temperature or combustion chamber
temperature high, then incinerator will turn into cooling process automatically)
“起动”按钮：根据工作模式的选择，起动焚烧程序。起动的条件如下。
z 炉门已经关闭
z 如果选择了污油或固体垃圾+污油模式，污油液位必须高于低位液位开关
z 没有报警（烟气高温或炉膛高温时可以起动，但是会马上转到冷却程序）
3.3.4.9. Key of “Stop”: Stop current operation, detail function as follow:
z If incinerator is stand-by without operation, it permits to stop sludge circulation pump or
sludge oil heater by pressing key “stop”, if sludge circulation pump or sludge oil heater
started manually.
z If incinerator is in slag mode, it permits to stop flue gas fan by pressing key “stop”, then
incinerator return to stand-by.
Page 15 of 188
Rev: V1.4 HSINC-50

z If incinerator is started up and flue gas fan is running, it permits to stop incinerator by
pressing key “stop”, then incinerator will turn into post purging and cooling process.
z If incinerator is running in sludge oil heating without flue gas in operation, it permits to
stop incinerator by pressing key “stop”, then incinerator return to stand-by.
z If incinerator is running in cooling, and combustion chamber temperature is less than
temperature setting of opening door, but high than temperature setting of incinerator stop, it
permits to stop incinerator by pressing key “stop”, then return to stand-by mode.
“停止”按钮：用于停止当前的动作，功能如下。
z 如果系统没有运行，污油循环泵或污油加热器手动起动后可以用“停止”按钮停止污油
循环泵和污油加热器。
z 如果在执行出灰程序，“停止”按钮可以停止烟气风机，返回待机状态。
z 如果系统已经起动，风机开始运行，按“停止”按钮会执行后扫风和冷却程序。
z 如果在污油加热阶段并且烟气风机没有运行时按下“停止”按钮，系统会马上停机进入
待机状态。
z 在冷却阶段，如果炉膛温度已经低于开炉门的温度，但是还高于停机温度，此时按“停
机”按钮系统会马上停机进入待机状态。
3.3.4.10. Functional key: there are six functional keys available on right side of HMI, the functional
keys have same working functions, even though HMI is in different pages. The functional
keys are easy for user to access certain function of incinerator, details as follow:
1. MEUN: display function description of F1~F6 by pressing key MENU
2. F1: Solid mode, same function of “solid” mode by pressing “solid” button on HMI
3. F2: Sludge mode, same function of “sludge” mode by pressing “sludge” button on HMI
4. F3: Start, same function of “start” mode by pressing “start” button on HMI
5. F4: Stop, same function of “stop” mode by pressing “stop” button on HMI
6. F5: Open door/ Slag: same function of “open door/ slag” button on HMI
快捷功能键：人机界面右侧有六个功能键，无论屏幕显示的是哪个页面，功能键的功能都
相同，操作方便快捷。具体描述如下：
7. MEUN：显示 F1-F6 的功能描述
8. F1：固体垃圾模式选择按钮，等同于操作页面上的“固体垃圾”按钮。
9. F2：污油模式选择按钮，等同于操作页面上的“污油”按钮。
10. F3：起动，等同于操作页面上的“起动”按钮
11. F4：停止，等同于操作页面上的“停止”按钮
12. F5：开门/出灰，等同于操作页面上的“开门/出灰”按钮
3.3.5. Chart of trend 趋势图
Page 16 of 188
Rev: V1.4 HSINC-50
Picture7
Chart of trend including temperature of combustion chamber, flue gas, vacuum of combustion
chamber. The incinerator will record figure and curve every 5s.
趋势图包括炉膛温度、烟气温度、炉膛真空度的数据记录曲线，每 5 秒钟记录一个数据。
3.3.6. Alarm page 报警页面

There is an alarm list with status available in this page, lamp in red stands for alarm, in green
stands for normal, in yellow stands for warning. (Just for battery voltage low of PLC)
画面显示一个报警项目清单及当前状态，指示灯报警时显示为红色，正常时显示为绿色，
警告时显示为黄色（只有 PLC 电池低电压是警告）
Picture8
3.3.7. Alarm history record 报警历史记录
Gives a history record of certain alarm and reset time.
将显示什么时间出现了什么报警，以及报警复位的时间
Page 17 of 188
Rev: V1.4 HSINC-50
Picture9
3.3.8. Data setting 参数设置
Pressing key of “Data set” in main Manu and keyword demands, the initial keyword is
“123456789”, and turn to page of “Data set” by imputing keyword, each item has code number
for setting. There would be №xx Corresponding to certain data, for example, the code of “Max
combustion chamber setting” is “1”, that means “№1” standing for “combustion chamber
setting” in aft page description for user good understanding. Further to function and description
of each data item, there would be described in detail later.
在主菜单按参数设定按钮，将会要求出入密码，密码是“123456789”。然后进入参数设定
页面。在参数设定页面所有数值输入项都有一个编号 xx，在后续说明中将会使用№xx 替
代这个参数，比如“最高炉膛温度设定值”的编号是 1，则“№1”代表“炉膛温度设定值”，以
便使描述更加清晰。各个参数的含义及作用将在后面的功能描述中详加说明
3.3.8.1. Main page description
主要页面说明
3.3.8.1.1. Data setting page 1, parameters setting of incinerator.
参数设定页面 1，设定焚烧炉运行的主要参数。
Picture10
z Working parameter of incinerator
z 设定焚烧炉运行的主要参数。
z Button of “More Data Set” , turn to more setting page
z “更多参数设定”按钮，将会进入更多的参数设定页面。
z Button of “LOGOUT” intended to logout from “Data set” page to main page and delete
Page 18 of 188
Rev: V1.4 HSINC-50

keyword record, if user intends to enter “Data set” page again, keyword required once more;
if user does not “LOGOUT”, the keyword remains available till power off, user can freely
enter “Data set” page without keyword.
z “注销”按钮，用于注销进入设定页面所输入的密码记录，回到主菜单后再进入设定页
面还需要输入密码；如果不经注销，输入的密码记录一直有效直到断电，进入设定页
面不需要再输入密码。
3.3.8.1.2. Data set page 2 (picture 11), details as follow:
Flue gas fan automatic start-up, default as 1.
0: If the combustion chamber temperature in stand-by is higher than the temperature of
door open (№34，default at 220℃), combustion temperature high alarm occurs.
1: If the combustion chamber temperature in stand-by higher than the temperature of
door open (№34), picture 12 will pop up for user attention of combustion temperature
high, flue gas fan will start up within 5s to cool down combustion chamber, and
combustion chamber high alarm occurs. If button “No” pressed, the cooling down
process is to be terminated, but combustion chamber temperature high still occurs.
Caution: if automatic cooling down inhibited, there could be risk of burner damage
due to burner un-fully cooling down; power off the system during maintenance and
repairing, in order to avoiding risk of flue gas fan and burner to be wrongly start up.
● Read the waring board before operting, as follow.
参数设定页面 2，（图 11）,内容如下：
z 自动起动烟气风机，出厂默认值为 1。
0：如果在待机时炉膛温度超过了炉膛开门的温度（№34，默认值 220 度）将会触
发炉膛高温报警。
1：如果在待机时炉膛温度超过了炉膛开门的温度（№34）将会跳出一个提示窗口
(图 12)，提示由于炉膛温度高，烟气风机将在 5 秒钟后起动冷却炉膛，将会触发
炉膛高温报警。如果此时按“取消”按钮，将会终止将要起动的冷却程序，但是会
触发炉膛高温报警。
注意：如果禁止自动起动冷却程序，燃烧器有被未被冷却的高温炉膛损坏的可能；维
修设备时一定要停电，防止烟气风机和燃烧器的意外起动。
● 运作前请务必通读警示牌（如下图）
Page 19 of 188
Rev: V1.4 HSINC-50
z Alarm contact, default as 0

0: Alarm contact activated upon alarm
1: Alarm contact activated without alarm, intended for detecting power failure alarm.
z 报警继电器，出厂默认值为 0。
0：报警时报警继电器线圈得电。
1：不报警时报警继电器线圈得电，用于需要检测电源故障的场合。
z Sludge alone burning mode, default as 1
0: Disenable sludge alone burning, whatever combustion temperature, at least one
diesel oil nozzle accompanying sludge oil burning, intended for sludge burning with
high percentage water or bad quality sludge, and avoiding frequent flame alarm.
1: In order to save diesel oil, if the combustion temperature exceeds setting (№3),
diesel oil will be reduced gradually until sludge oil burning independently.
z 独立燃烧污油，出厂默认值为 1。
0：不允许独立燃烧污油，无论炉膛温度是多少，至少有一个柴油喷嘴与污油伴烧，
用于水分含量很高或不易燃烧的污油焚烧，以防出现过多的火焰故障。
1：为了节约柴油，在炉膛温度超过设定值（№3）时会逐步减少柴油消耗，直到
独立燃烧污油。
z Hour meter: turn to page of hour meter, displaying of working hour accumulated of each
motor.
Flue gas accumulating time: 0.00-42949672.95 hr
Burner accumulating time: 0.00-42949672.95 hr
Sludge oil circulating pump time: 0.00-42949672.95 hr
Sludge oil dosing pump time: 0.00-42949672.95 hr
z 累积计时器：跳转到累积计时器页面，显示各个马达的累积运行时间。
烟气风机累积运行时间，0.00-42949672.95 小时。
燃烧器马达累积运行时间，0.00-42949672.95 小时。
污油循环泵累积运行时间，0.00-42949672.95 小时。
污油计量泵累积运行时间，0.00-42949672.95 小时。
Picture 11
Page 20 of 188
Rev: V1.4 HSINC-50
Picture12
3.3.8.1.3. Last page of data set, picture 13, intended for default setting.
z Restore to factory setting: all data restore to default
z Save commissioning setting: save current setting, probably better than default
z Restore commissioning setting: restore previous commissioning setting
In order to avoiding wrong operation, corresponding button need to keep pushed more than 8s.
在参数设定的末页，如图 13，用于恢复默认设定，
z 恢复出厂设定：所有参数恢复到程序中的默认值。
z 保存调试设定：保存当前的设定值，可能会比出厂设定更适合当前的设备。
z 恢复调试设定：恢复以前保存的调试设定值。
为了防止意外操作，所以要长按相应的按钮约 8 秒钟。
Picture 图 13
Page 21 of 188
Rev: V1.4 HSINC-50

Picture 14
3.3.8.1.4. Other data setting as picture 14, or equivalent, please check by turning page, and modify
setting by pressing number keyboard. Details as follow:
其它参数设定页面如图 14，或者类似，可以通过翻页进行浏览，点击显示的数字框即可
修改，不在一一列举，将以表格的形式加以说明如下：
Main description of data setting

主要参数设定说明
Table 1
No Description Default Setting
描述默认值设定范围
1. Max combustion chamber temperature setting: combustion 1150℃ 0-1150
chamber temperature exceeds such setting, oil injection reduced
and chamber vacuum increased
最高炉膛温度设定值：炉膛温度超过这个温度后会减少喷油
量或增加真空度
2. Temperature setting of combustion chamber for initial sludge oil 850℃ 0-999
injection
开始供给污油的炉膛温度
3. Temperature setting of sludge oil burning independently: diesel 950℃ 0-1050
oil is to be reduced gradually till sludge oil burning
independently; if sludge oil independent burning disabled, the
minimum diesel oil accompanying with sludge oil burning
污油独立燃烧时的温度：超过这个温度柴油会逐次减少，直
至独立燃烧污油；如果不允许污油独立燃烧，将会有一个最
小的柴油喷嘴与污油伴烧
4. Max flue gas temperature: oil injection is to be reduced upon 330℃ 0-350
flue gas temperature exceeding such setting
烟气温度最大值：超过这个温度会减少喷油量的动作
5. Max combustion temperature alarm setting: Max combustion 1180℃ 0-1180
temperature alarm occurs upon combustion temperature
exceeding such setting
炉膛温度高报警值：超过这个值会触发炉膛高温报警
6. Flue gas temperature high alarm: flue gas temperature alarm 350℃ 0-375
occur upon flue gas temperature exceeding such setting
烟气温度高报警值：超过这个值会触发烟气高温报警
7. Combustion chamber vacuum low alarm: combustion chamber 5mmWC 1-9
vacuum low alarm occur upon combustion chamber vacuum less
than such setting
炉膛真空度低报警：炉膛真空度低于这个值会触发低真空度
报警
11. Inner setting in PLC for sludge oil pump frequency D/A, 0-0Hz, -- 0-4000
Page 22 of 188
Rev: V1.4 HSINC-50

4000-Max frequency （No44），the default setting （No44）is
50Hz, No11/80=current frequency, subject setting is waving
corresponding to running situation of program, also can be
modified manually, in order to change oil injection
污油泵频率 D/A 的 PLC 的内部数据，0-对应 0Hz，4000 对
应变频器的最大频率（No44）,比如 No44 出厂设定为 50Hz，
No11/80=当前频率，这个值受程序控制增大或减小，可以手
动修改，以便改变喷油量。
12. Initial start-up frequency of sludge oil pump: initial frequency of 15 Hz 2-50
sludge oil pump start-up, the program need to control
combustion temperature and vacuum base on such setting
污油泵起始频率：污油计量泵开始运行时的频率初值，程序
会根据温度和真空度在此基础上加以控制
13. Max frequency of sludge oil pump: no increasing of frequency 50 Hz 3-60
upon such setting reached
污油泵最大频率：达到这个值后将不会再增加
14. Minimum frequency of sludge oil pump: no decreasing of 2 Hz 2-50
frequency upon such setting reached
污油泵最小频率：达到这个之后将不会再减小
15. Combustion chamber vacuum of ignition 18mmWC 1-40
点火时的炉膛真空度
16. Max vacuum of combustion chamber during burning 35mmWC 1-99
燃烧时炉膛最大真空度
17. Combustion chamber vacuum on cooling during post purging 20mmWC 1-120
后扫风、冷却时的炉膛真空度
18. Combustion chamber vacuum on initial sludge oil dosing 20mmWC 1-40
开始喷污油时的炉膛真空度
19. Combustion chamber vacuum on pre-purging 20mmWC 1-99
前扫风时的炉膛真空度
20. Minimum combustion chamber vacuum, if the combustion 16mmWC 1-30
chamber temperature is impossible to be increased, the program
need to slow down combustion vacuum, which is no less than
such setting
炉膛最小真空度，如果无法提高炉膛温度，程序会尝试降低
炉膛真空度以便提高炉膛温度，但是不能小于这个设定值
21. Control dead zone of combustion chamber vacuum: if the 1mmWC 1-5
combustion chamber vacuum is more deviated from pre-setting,
the program will drive flue gas damper to rectify vacuum till
value less than such setting
炉膛真空度的控制死区：如果炉膛真空度偏离设定值，程序
会通过操作烟气风门进行修正，直到误差小于这个值
22. Offset value of each vacuum increasing step: vacuum offset 2mmWC 1-5
Page 23 of 188
Rev: V1.4 HSINC-50

increasing of each step interval according to No38 defined
炉膛真空度增加时的步长：在 No38 规定的时间间隔中按程
序要求增加真空度的步长
23. Offset value of each vacuum decreasing step: vacuum offset 2mmWC 1-5
decreasing of each step interval according to No38 defined
炉膛真空度减小时的步长：在 No38 规定的时间间隔中按程
序要求减小真空度的步长
24. In solid mode, the minimum temperature increasing interval 25℃ 0-50
according to No25 defined, if combustion chamber temperature
increasing less than such value, the program need to increase
diesel oil injection or decrease vacuum in order to increase
combustion temperature rising speed
在固体垃圾模式下，在 No25 规定的时间间隔中的最小温升
值，如果温升小于这个温度，程序会尝试增加柴油或减小真
空度的方式提高温升速度
25. In solid mode, time interval of combustion temperature rising 60s 1-99
speed
在固体垃圾模式下测量温升速度(No24)的时间间隔
26. Max combustion temperature control dead zone, if the 10℃ 1-30
combustion chamber temperature exceeding No1, the program
will decrease oil injection. If less than (No4-No27), the program
will increase oil injection
炉膛最高温度（No1)控制死区，炉膛温度超过 No1 后会减油，
低于(No1-No26)后可能会加油
27. Flue gas temperature control dead zone, if the flue gas 5℃ 1-20
temperature exceeding No4, the program will decrease oil
injection, if less than (No4-No27), the program will increase oil
injection
烟气温度的控制死区，烟气温度超过 No4 后会减油，低于
(No4-No27)后可能会加油
28. Temperature control dead zone, that’s corresponding to initial oil 10℃ 1-99
injection temperature (No2) and sludge oil independent burning
temperature (No3)
针对开始喷污油的温度(No2)、污油独立燃烧的温度(No3)的
温度控制死区
29. Combustion vacuum is to be increased to Max, if combustion 1000℃ 0-1150
temperature exceeding such setting
超过此设定温度，真空度将逐步增加到最大值，
30. Spare --- ---
备用
31. Spare --- ---
备用
Page 24 of 188
Rev: V1.4 HSINC-50

32. In sludge mode, the Minimum temperature rising rate within 0℃ 0-99
each sampling time that defined in No33, if temperature rising
rate less than such data, the program will increase diesel oil
injection and further reduce vacuum in order to increasing
temperature rising; if temperature rising rate exceeding such
data, that means sludge oil to be increase properly, frequency of
sludge oil dosing pump is to be increase accordingly
在污油模式下，在 No33 设定的取样时间内的最小温升值，
如果温升小于这个值将会增加柴油、减小真空度，以提高温
升；如果温度超过这个值，说明污油将会酌情增加，污油计
量泵频率会被提高
33. Measurement interval of combustion temperature rising (No32) 30s 1-99
in sludge oil mode
污油模式下测量炉膛温升(No32)的时间间隔
34. Combustion chamber temperature of door-open permission in 220℃ 0-220
stand-by mode, No34-No35 is the shut-down temperature setting
in cooling program
待机时允许开炉门的温度,No34-No35 即为冷却程序中的停
机温度
35. The incinerator comes into stand-by mode upon combustion 120℃ 1-199
chamber temperature drop less than (No34-No35) during
cooling down; in stand-by mode, if combustion chamber
temperature is high than No34, the incinerator will perform
cooling down program (if permitted) until combustion chamber
temperature less than (No34-No35)
在运行冷却程序时如果炉膛温度低于（No34-No35）即会进
入待机状态；在待机状态，如果温度高于 No34 即会起动冷
却程序（如果允许），直到炉膛温度低于（No34-No35）。
36. Combustion vacuum is to be increased to maximum, if flue gas 310℃ 0-340
temperature exceeding such data
烟气温度超过这个值后，炉膛真空度将会逐步增加到最大值
(No16)
37. Spare --- ---
备用
38. Interval of automatic vacuum increasing/ decreasing, deviation 60s 1-99
of each step No22/No23
自动增加/降低真空度的时间间隔，每次改变的步长是
No22/No23
39. Closing flue gas damper in first upon slag performing, flue gas 30s 0-200
starting-up is delayed after (No39)s
执行出灰程序时首先执行烟气风门关闭动作，烟气风机延时
(No39)秒后开始运行
Page 25 of 188
Rev: V1.4 HSINC-50

40. In sludge oil mode, time delay of sludge low temperature alarm 20s 1-999
during incinerating
污油模式下，焚烧时污油低温报警的延时时间
41. In sludge oil mode, time delay of sludge low temperature alarm 300min 1-999
upon heating activated
污油模式下，“起动”后污油加热阶段的污油低温报警延时
42. Sludge oil high temperature alarm 90℃ 0-99
污油高温报警设定值
43. Sludge oil low temperature alarm 60℃ 0-80
污油低温报警设定值
44. Max frequency of converter, which is corresponding to setting of 50Hz 10-100
frequency converter
变频器的最大频率，要与变频器的设定值相匹配
45. Reduce frequency step of sludge oil dosing pump, refer to No11, 20 1-99
(No45)/4000*(No44) is equal to real frequency
降低污油计量泵频率的步长，数值含义参见 No11，
(No45)/4000*(No44)等于实际变化的频率数
46. Increase frequency step of sludge oil dosing pump, refer to 20 1-99
No11, (No46)/4000*(No44) is equal to real frequency
提高污油计量泵频率的步长，数值含义参见 No11，
(No46)/4000*(No44)等于实际变化的频率数
47. Measurement range of combustion vacuum sensor, which needs 152mmWc 50-500
to march measurement range of real sensor
炉膛真空度传感器的量程，要与实际传感器匹配
48. Battery voltage low of PLC, just for indication no modification, --- ---
alarm occurs upon voltage low than 3.0V. The battery life no less
than 5 years, it’s no problem functionally within one month upon
initial alarm occurs. If running out of battery, there could be the
risk of losing program upon PLC power-off. For details, please
refer to chapter of battery changing
PLC 电池电压，数值显示，不能修改，低于 3.0V 会触发电
池低压警告。一般电池寿命不低于 5 年，首次出现电池低压
报警后一个月内也不会有问题。如果电池耗尽，在 PLC 电源
关断的情况下有丢失程序的风险，请详细阅读更换电池的章
节。
3.4. Alarm 报警系统
3.4.1. General description 概述

z Alarm lamp flashing and relay deliver extension upon alarm occurs
z New alarm occurs without former alarm resetting, alarm relay will be reset 2s in order to
giving alarm extension to ECR
Page 26 of 188
Rev: V1.4 HSINC-50

z Alarm lamp stop flashing upon user confirm and acknowledge alarm
z Upon acknowledgement of alarms, which are under reset condition, the alarm relay with
lamp are to be reset accordingly
z 在出现新报警时，报警指示灯会闪动，报警继电器输出报警信号，
z 存在未复位报警的情况下如果出现新的报警，报警继电器将会复位 2 秒钟，以便触发
报警监控系统。
z 要用户确认以后报警指示灯停止闪动
z 报警经过确认，并且达到报警复位的条件后，报警才会复位，所有报警复位后报警指
示灯熄灭
3.4.2. Alarm list 报警内容

Table 2
No. Alarm item Cause Action Reset condition
序报警项目触发原因安全保护动作复位条件
号
1. Motor Any motor overload shut-down incinerator, Reset all motor
overload post purging and cooling overload relay
任何一个马达断路器过
马达过载载停机，如果在运行中，所有马达断路器处在
执行后扫风和冷却正常位置
2. Combustion Combustion chamber Posting purging and Combustion chamber
chamber temperature exceeds cooling temperature less than
high setting during flue gas setting
temperature running 后扫风和冷却
alarm （No5，default 1180℃）炉膛温度低于炉膛高
温报警值
燃烧室高温烟气风机运行时，炉膛
报警温度超过炉膛高温报警
值（No5，默认 1180 度）
Combustion chamber Non Combustion chamber
temperature exceeds (if automatic cooling temperature lower
setting of open door down enabled, no alarm down to setting of
activates) open door, or flue gas
烟气风机停机时，炉膛 fan keeps running
温度超过炉门开门的温无
度（No34，默认 220 度）, （如果允许自动起动冷炉膛温度降低到开门
并且不允许烟气风机自却程序，将不会报警）温度以下，或者烟气
动起动风机运行
3. Flame No flame detected during Post purging and cooling Alarm acknowledge
failure incinerator burning and reset
后扫风和冷却
Page 27 of 188
Rev: V1.4 HSINC-50

火焰故障在燃烧过程中火焰传感报警确认后即可复位
器没有检测到火焰信号
After pre-purge, before Post purging and cooling Alarm acknowledge
ignition, the flame sensor and reset
need to detect flame or 后扫风和冷却
not, a window jump out 报警确认后即可复位
for flame confirmation
前扫风后，点火前，火
焰传感器检测到了火焰
信号，跳出提示窗口后
没有得到炉膛有火焰的
确认
4. Flue gas Flue gas temperature Perform post purging and Flue gas temperature
high exceeds high temperature cooling, if incinerator is less than high
temperature alarm setting working temperature alarm
setting
烟气高温报烟气温度超过高温报警如果在运行中，执行后
警的设定值（No6，默认扫风和冷却烟气温度低于高温报
350 度）警的设定值
5. Failure of No A/D converter Perform post purging and A/D converter
PLC A/D detected cooling, if incinerator is detected
converter working
检测不到 A/D 转换模块检测到 A/D 转换模块
PLC A/D 转 A/D module failure 如果在运行中，执行后 Failure disappeared of
换模块故障 during data transmission 扫风和冷却 A/D module on data
(not to be simulated) transmission
A/D 模块在数据转过程 A/D 模块在数据转过

中出现故障（无法模拟）程中的故障消失
6. Combustion Combustion chamber Post purging and cooling Combustion chamber
chamber vacuum detecting within vacuum exceeds
vacuum low 45s in continuously 后扫风和冷却 alarm setting or
alarm during flue gas fan incinerator in stand-by
working, (except slag mode
燃烧室真空 program)
度低报警真空度超过报警设定
在烟气风机运行时（出值或者处于待机状态
灰过程除外）连续 45 秒
低于炉膛真空度报警设
定值（No7）
7. Over/under The control voltage Incinerator shut-down, Control voltage within
Page 28 of 188
Rev: V1.4 HSINC-50

voltage over/under 220V±10% perform post purge and range of 220V±10%
alarm cooling if incinerator is
控制箱内的控制电压超 working 控制电压处于
过/欠电压出 220V±10%的范围 220V±10%的范围内
报警停机，如果在运行中，
执行后扫风和冷却
8. Compressed In sludge mode, the Incinerator shut-down, Step out sludge mode,
air pressure compressed air pressure perform post purge and or rectify compressed
low alarm less than setting (4bar) cooling if incinerator is air pressure and keep
working exceeding setting
压缩空气压选择了污油模式，并且
力低报警压缩空气的压力低于压停机，如果在运行中，取消了污油模式或者
力开关的设定值（4bar）执行后扫风和冷却压缩空气的压力超过
压力开关的设定值
9. Sludge oil Sludge oil pressure less Incinerator shut-down, Sludge oil pressure
pressure low than setting of pressure post purging and cooling exceeds setting of
alarm switch during sludge oil if incinerator is working pressure switch, or
circulation pump running in automatic mode; sludge
污油压力低
报警污油循环泵运行中，污 Sludge oil circulation 污油压力超过污油压
油压力低于污油压力开 pump doesn’t stop if 力开关的设定值，或
关的设定值 incinerator is working in 者污油泵停止
manual mode
如果在自动运行中，停
机，执行后扫风和冷却；
如果在手动起动的污油
泵将不会自动停止！
10. Diesel oil Diesel oil pressure low Incinerator shut-down, Keep diesel oil
pressure low than setting during perform post purging and pressure exceeds
alarm burner is running cooling, burner doesn’t setting of pressure
work even combustion switch, or incinerator
柴油压力低燃烧器马达运行中，柴 vacuum turns to normal comes into stand-by
报警油压力低于柴油压力开 mode (in post purging
关的设定值停机，执行后扫风和冷 stage, no alarm reset
却，如果炉膛真空度正 even burner stop)
常，燃烧器将不会运行
柴油压力超过柴油压
力开关的设定值，或
者进入待机状态（在
后扫风阶段，燃烧器
停止也不会复位）
Page 29 of 188
Rev: V1.4 HSINC-50

11. Sludge tank Confirm sludge mode Incinerator shut-down if Sludge oil level higher
level low before start-up, sludge incinerator running than level switch, or
alarm level low than switch automatically, then cancel sludge oil
perform post purging and mode, or keep system
污油柜液位选择了污油模式，在起 cooling; in stand-by mode
低报警动时，污油柜液位低于 If sludge oil pump or
低液位液位开关 heater start-up in manual, 污油柜液位高于低液
stop both of them 位液位开关，或者取
消了污油模式，或者
如果在自动运行中，停处于待机状态
如果污油泵或污油加热
器手动启动的，停止运
行
12. Frequency Frequency converter Incinerator shut-down if Frequency converter
converter failure running in automatic resumes to normal
alarm 变频器出现故障 mode, then perform post
purging and cooling 变频器恢复正常
变频器故障
报警如果在自动运行中，停
13. Sludge oil
Sludge oil temperature Stop heating turns to Keep sludge oil
low lower than setting within stand-by temperature low than
temperature
pre-set time (No41, alarm setting, or
default 300min) during 停止加热，待机 cancel sludge oil
污油低温报 automatic heating stage mode, or incinerator
警 in cooling and
处于污油自动加热阶 stand-by stage
段，污油温度低于污油
低温报警值超过预设时污油温度超过低温报
间（No41，默认 300 分警设定值，或者取消
钟）污油模式，或者处于
In sludge oil mode, Incinerator shut-down, 冷却、待机阶段
sludge oil temperature perform post purging and
less than pre-setting cooling
start-up incinerator,
停机，执行后扫风和冷
污油模式下，开始焚烧却
后，污油温度低于污油
低温报警值超过预设时
间（No40，默认 20 秒钟）
14. Sludge oil Sludge oil temperature is Shut-down if incinerator Sludge oil
Page 30 of 188
Rev: V1.4 HSINC-50

high higher than alarm setting running automatically, temperature lower
temperature perform post purging and than setting
alarm 污油温度超过污油高温 cooling, stop manual
报警的设定值 heating 污油温度低于污油高
污油高温报温报警设定值
警如果在自动运行中，停
停止手动加热
15. PLC batter PLC batter voltage lower Warning activated once, 确认后报警指示灯、
low voltage than 3.0V for attention to user to 报警继电器复位。报
alarm change battery. 警页面中的对应的警
PLC 电池电压低于 3.0V There is warning flashing 告灯保持黄色直到电
PLC 电池电 available in HMI panel. 池电压恢复正常
压低警告 Please keep power on
during battery replacing.
Caution:
There is risk of PLC
program missing if
power off incinerator
with PLC batter voltage
low. Please read
carefully for batter
replacing chapter in the
manual
触发一次报警，提醒用
户更换电池。流程图页
面有文字闪动提醒有警
告信息。在更换电池前
应保持供给电源
注意：PLC 电池耗尽后
停电有丢失 PLC 程序的
风险，请仔细阅读更换
电池的章节
3.5. Function description 功能描述

3.5.1. General description 概述
The PLC program is intended for perform function of solid/sludge incinerator under pre-set
parameter and requirement.
控制程序按照操作要求和各种参数的设定执行相应的完成相应的垃圾及污油焚烧功能。
Page 31 of 188
Rev: V1.4 HSINC-50

The PLC program mainly as follow: 主要的程序包括：
z Stand-by for follow function available

z 待机，待机时可以执行如下动作
Manual start/stop sludge oil circulation pump, refers to “operation page” in
regard to description of circulation pump.
手动起动、停止污油循环泵，请参考“操作页面”关于“循环泵”按钮的描述。
Manual start/stop sludge oil heater, refers to “operation page” in regard to
description of “sludge oil heater”
手动起动、停止污油加热器，请参考“操作页面”关于“污油加热器”按钮的描
述。
Open incinerator door for solid loading
开炉门，装填垃圾
The incinerator will perform automatic cooling if combustion chamber
temperature exceeding setting of open door in default, refer to data page 2 in
regard to description of automatic cooling down.
默认情况下，如果炉膛温度高于开炉门的温度会自动起动冷去程序，请参
考参数设定页面 2 中关于自动起动冷却程序的描述。
Start-up incinerator in mode of “solid”, “sludge oil”, “solid + sludge”
起动焚烧炉，按选定的工作模式（固体垃圾、污油、固体垃圾+污油）执行
预定程序
Open incinerator door, slag
开炉门，出灰
z Solid mode description, mainly as follow
z 固体垃圾焚烧程序，主要执行如下内容：
Pre-purging
前扫风
Ignition
点火
Solid incinerating
固体垃圾焚烧
Post-purging and cooling
后扫风及冷却
z Sludge mode description, mainly as follow
z 污油焚烧程序，主要执行如下内容：
Sludge oil heating
污油加热
Pre-purging
前扫风
Ignition
点火
Combustion chamber heating
Page 32 of 188
Rev: V1.4 HSINC-50

炉膛加热
Sludge oil incinerating
污油焚烧
后扫风及冷却
z Solid + sludge mode, the incinerator perform program of solid mode in first. If solid
heat is insufficient, then turn to sludge mode, mainly as follow
z 固体垃圾+污油焚烧程序，首先执行固体垃圾焚烧程序，如果检测到固体垃圾的
热量已经不是很高了，那就转到污油焚烧程序执行。主要执行如下内容：
Sludge heating
污油加热
Pre-purging
前扫风
Ignition
点火
Solid burning
固体垃圾焚烧
Sludge burning
污油焚烧
后扫风及冷却
z Slag of incinerator, closing of flue gas damper, start flue gas fan after (No39s) delay
in order to remove ashes
z 出灰，关闭烟气风门，延时(No39 秒)起动烟气风机，以便清除炉灰。
z Vacuum adjustment, adjusting of combustion vacuum through flue gas damper
control as program. Stop flue gas damper action if vacuum deviation less than
(No21，mmWc)
z 真空度调节程序，辅助程序，根据其他程序设定的炉膛真空度，通过控制烟气
风门去调节炉膛真空度。当真空度偏差小于(No21，mmWc)时，将停止风门动
作。
3.5.2. Solid operation description 固体垃圾焚烧操作说明
3.5.2.1. Pre-purging 前扫风

In order to secure displacement of combustible gas in combustion chamber before ignition,
the incinerator will perform pre-purging, which is no less than 15s before ignition. Vacuum
setting of pre-purging as No19
为了在点火以前将炉膛内可能存在的可燃气体排出炉膛要进行前扫风，前扫风的时间不
小于 15 秒，前扫风时的真空度设定值为 No19。
3.5.2.2. Ignition 点火
Flame checking before ignition, if PLC detects flame in combustion chamber, there will be
Page 33 of 188
Rev: V1.4 HSINC-50

an caution page jumping out, if button “YES” pressed within 5s or button “NO” pressed
directly, flame failure alarm is to be activated accordingly; if button “YES” pressed, further
confirmed residual flame in combustion chamber, the incinerator will perform normal
ignition program accordingly.
z 点火前首先要进行火焰检查，如果炉膛内检测到了火焰信号，将会弹出一个提示界面，
如果 5 秒钟内没有按“有”的按钮或直接按了“没有”按钮将会触发火焰故障报警；如果
在 5 秒钟内按了“有”按钮以确认炉膛内确实有残存的火焰，系统将会按照正常的操作
执行点火程序。
Picture 15
z Adjustment of combustion chamber vacuum till setting reached (No15, default 18)
z 将炉膛真空度控制到点火真空度（No15，默认 18）设定的水平。
z Ignition transformer power on 10s, solenoid valve of diesel oil nozzle (No.1 nozzle, small)
open at 6th second
z 然后点火变压器送电 10 秒钟，从第 6 秒钟开始可打开柴油喷嘴 1（小喷嘴）。
z Check flame or not in combustion chamber upon power-off ignition transformer. Alarm
occurs if no flame; incinerator perform coming program if flame detected
z 点火变压器断电后，然后检查炉膛内是否有火焰。如果没有火焰将触发火焰故障报警；
如果检测到火焰将会去执行固体垃圾焚烧程序。
3.5.2.3. Control program of solid mode 固体垃圾焚烧控制程序
z Increase combustion vacuum to Max (No16, default 35) upon solid mode start-up
z 起动固体垃圾焚烧程序后，首先将炉膛真空度调节到最大值（No16，默认 35）。
z Check combustion temperature rising within interval of preset time (No25, default 60s), if
temperature rising rate less than Minimum setting (No24, default 25℃), one step oil
injection required, the No.1 (small oil injection) turns to No.2 (Middle oil injection), or
No.2 turns to No.2+No.3). If the oil injection is in Maximum, the PLC will slow down
combustion vacuum to pre-setting, the adjustment space of vacuum (No23, default 2mmWc)
on each interval of pre-set (No38, default 60s), till Minimum combustion vacuum setting
(No20). If the combustion temperature reaches pre-setting No29(default 1000℃), or flue
gas temperature reach pre-setting No36 (default 310℃), the combustion vacuum is no more
slow down.
z 在预定的时间间隔（No25，默认 60 秒）上检测炉膛温升，如果温升小于最小温升限
定值（No24，默认 25 度），就增加一级柴油，也就是小火（喷嘴 1）转中火（喷嘴 2），
Page 34 of 188
Rev: V1.4 HSINC-50

中火（喷嘴 2）转大火（喷嘴 1+喷嘴 2）。如果柴油已经达到最大值，那就会按照预
定的程序降低炉膛真空度，在设定的时间间隔上(No38，默认 60 秒)每次降低(No23，
默认 2mmWc)设定的数值，最小可以减到炉膛最小真空度（No20）。如果炉膛温度达
到 No29 设定的温度（默认 1000 度）或者烟气温度达到 No36 设定的温度（默认 310
度），真空度将不再降低。
z If the flue gas temperature reaches Maximum setting (No1, default 1150℃) or flue gas
temperature reaches Maximum setting (No4, default 330℃), the PLC will increase
combustion vacuum gradually under pre-setting vacuum adjustment space (No23, default
2mmWc) on each interval of pre-set (No38, default 60s), until Maximum combustion
vacuum (No16, default 35); if combustion temperature less than No1-No26 (corresponding
to dead zone, default 10℃), and flue gas temperature less than No4-No27 (corresponding
to dead zone, default 10℃), the incinerator will intend to increase oil injection and
lower-down vacuum, and keep combustion temperature maintained in high level.
z 当烟气温度达到最大设定值（No1，默认 1150 度）或者烟气温度达到最大设定值（No4，
默认 330 度）将会逐步增加炉膛真空度，在设定的时间间隔上(No38，默认 60 秒)每
次升高(No22，默认 2mmWc)设定的数值，最大可以增加到炉膛最大真空度（No16，
默认 35）；如果炉膛温度低于 No1-No26(对应的死区温度，默认 10 度)，并且烟气低
于 No4-No27(对应的死区温度，默认值 5 度)时将尝试增加柴油并降低真空度，炉膛温
度将最终保持在一个较高的水平。
z If alarm occur, or “Emergency Stop” button pressed, or running-out of time pre-setting, the
incinerator will turn to post-purging and cooling.
z 当出现报警、或按下“停止”按钮、或预设燃烧时间达到时将会转到后扫风和冷却程序
执行。
3.5.2.4. Post-purging and cooling 后扫风和冷却
z Combustion vacuum to be adjusted to setting of post-purging vacuum (No17, default

20mmWc)
z 负压将会被调整到后扫风真空度(No17，默认 20mmWc)的设定值。
z Post-purging time not less than 30s
z 后扫风时间不少于 30 秒钟
z Incinerator turns to stand-by mode if combustion temperature less than No34-No35 (default
220-120=100℃)
z 如果炉膛温度低于 No34-No35(默认 220-120=100 度)时转入待机状态
z Incinerator turns to stand-by mode if combustion temperature less than (No34) temperature
setting of open door, and press key “stop” once more. If the combustion chamber
temperature rising over temperature setting of open door again, and “auto cooling” enabled,
the incinerator will turn to automatic cooling as program; otherwise high temperature alarm
of combustion chamber is to be activated.
z 如果炉膛温度低于炉膛开门温度（No34）后，再按一次“停止”按钮，会马上转入待机
状态。如果此后炉膛温度又超过了炉膛开门温度，如果允许自动起动进行冷却，将会
自动转入冷却程序；否则将会触发炉膛高温报警。
z If diesel oil pressure low alarm occurs and vacuum is normal, burner will stop; if diesel oil
Page 35 of 188
Rev: V1.4 HSINC-50

pressure low alarm occurs, but combustion chamber vacuum less than setting (No7), burner
will not be shut-down due to diesel oil pressure low.
z 如果出现柴油低压报警，炉膛真空度正常，燃烧器将停止运行；如果出现了柴油低压
报警，但是同时炉膛真空度低于真空度低报警值(No7)时，燃烧器不会因为柴油低压
而停止运行。
3.5.3. Sludge mode operation 污油焚烧操作说明
3.5.3.1. Sludge oil heating 污油加热程序
z Check sludge oil temperature first, if sludge oil temperature high than setting of sludge oil
tank, or sludge oil temperature lower than setting over 5℃, the incinerator will turn to
pre-purging automatically.
z 首先检查污油温度，如果污油温度高于污油柜温度开关的设定值，或者污油温度比污
油低温报警温度高出 5 度以上，都会转去执行前扫风程序。
z If the combustion chamber temperature exceeds temperature setting (No34) of open door,
flue gas fan will start automatically, and carry out cooling down until combustion chamber
temperature less than (No34-No35), combustion chamber vacuum equals to (No19) of
pre-purging vacuum.
z 如果在此期间炉膛温度超过炉膛开门温度（No34），烟气风机将会自动起动来冷却炉
膛，直到炉膛温度低于冷却终止温度（No34-No35），炉膛真空度等同于前扫风的真
空度 No19。
z If shut-down or alarm occurs, the incinerator will carry out further program step up to
status of flue gas fan; and turn to stand-by mode if flue gas fan not running; or turns to
cooling mode if flue gas fan running.
z 如果在此期间出现停机命令或报警时，将根据烟气风机的状态决定程序走向：烟气风
机没有运行时将会马上转到待机状态；如果烟气风机正在运行将会直接转到冷却程
序。
3.5.3.2. Pre-purging 前扫风
Equals to pre-purging program in solid mode

等同于固体垃圾焚烧的前扫风程序。
3.5.3.3. Ignition 点火
Equals to ignition program in solid mode

等同于固体垃圾焚烧的点火程序。
3.5.3.4. Combustion chamber heating 炉膛加热
z Burner close damper to minimum, combustion vacuum slow down to minimum (No2)-20
also, big nozzle open so that increase temperature rising speed.
z 燃烧器关小风门，炉膛真空度调节到最小值(No20)，使用柴油大火，以便提高炉膛
升温速度。
z The incinerator turns to sludge oil mode automatically upon combustion chamber
Page 36 of 188
Rev: V1.4 HSINC-50

temperature reach (No2)-20 of sludge oil burning setting.
z 当炉膛达到起始污油焚烧温度低(No2)-20 度时，将会转到污油焚烧控制程序
z If shut-down or alarm occurs, the incinerator will turn to post-purging and cooling
program automatically.
z 如果出现停机命令或报警，将转入后扫风和冷却程序。
3.5.3.5. Sludge mode operation of program 污油焚烧控制程序
z Combustion chamber vacuum to be adjusted to initial vacuum setting (No18)

z 首先真空度调节到污油起始真空度(No18)
z Combustion chamber temperature reaches between (No2, default 850℃) and (No3，
default 950℃)
z 炉膛温度在(No2,默认 850 度)至(No3，默认 950 度)之间
Upon combustion temperature reaching initial setting (No2), sludge oil dosing
pump starts up under initial frequency (No12), and diesel oil nozzle turns to small
one simultaneously.
当炉膛温度达到污油起始炉膛温度(No2)后，污油计量泵起动，频率为污油泵
起始频率(No12)，同时柴油切换到小火。
If combustion temperature lowers down to (No2-No10), incinerator will shut-off
sludge oil supply, and open big diesel oil nozzle again, also the diesel oil
consumption will be increased more or less.
如果炉膛温度又下降到(No2-No10)的温度，停止污油供给，重新柴油大火升温。
如果连续几次温度下降将会提升伴烧的柴油量。
If temperature rising exceeds (No32, default 0℃) within rated time setting (No33,
default 30s), sludge oil dosing frequency will step up gradually, increasing span
(No46) with rated time setting (No33).
如果在额定时间内(No33，默认 30 秒)，温升超过(No32，默认 0 度)，污油频率
将会逐步增加，额定时间内(No33)增加(No46)设定的数值。
Lack of combustion temperature rising speed will cause more consumption of diesel
oil, if big diesel oil nozzle activated already, the incinerator will step down
combustion chamber vacuum gradually in order to increasing combustion chamber
temperature.
如果连续温升不足会导致柴油火力增加，如果柴油已经是大火，则炉膛真空度
会逐步减小以便提高炉膛温度。
If the combustion chamber temperature reaches (No3) of sludge independent
burning, diesel oil will reduced gradually to minimum until sludge oil independent
burning. If sludge oil independent burning mode disabled, there will be diesel oil
accompanying burning with sludge always.
炉膛温度达到污油独立燃烧的温度(No3)后，柴油油量将会初步减小，直到污
油独立燃烧。但是如果不允许无有独立燃烧时，最终会有柴油小火与污油伴烧。
If combustion chamber temperature lowers down less than (No3-No10), there will
be diesel oil accompanying burning again, also the diesel oil consumption will be
increased more or less.
Page 37 of 188
Rev: V1.4 HSINC-50

如果炉膛温度又降到(No3-No10)以下时，就会重新有柴油参与伴烧。连续几次
温度下降会使柴油火力增大一级。
z If temperature exceeds independent sludge burning setting from (No3) to (No1-50)℃,
sludge oil will be increased according to temperature rising speed, the higher rising
speed the lower sludge dosing rate, the lower rising speed the higher sludge dosing rate.
z 温度大于污油独立燃烧炉膛温度(No3)直到(No1-50)度，污油会根据温升速率增加，
温升快加油慢，温升慢加油快。
z If the combustion chamber temperature exceeds (No29, default 1000) or flue gas
temperature exceeds (No36, default 310), the combustion chamber temperature will
increase gradually till maximum vacuum. The increasing time interval (No38), step
(No22)mmWc; if combustion chamber temperature lower than (No29, default1000), and
flue gas temperature lower than (No36, default 310), combustion chamber vacuum will
be reduced gradually to minimum, step (No23)mmWc.
z 当炉膛温度超过(No29，默认 1000)或烟气温度超过(No36，默认 310)后炉膛温度逐
步增加，直到最大真空度。增加时间间隔为(No38)秒，步长为(No22)mmWc；当炉
膛温度低于(No29，默认 1000)，并且烟气温度低于(No36，默认 310)后，炉膛真空
度将逐步减小，步长为(No23)mmWc
z If combustion chamber temperature exceeds (No1-50), but does not reach maximum
setting (No1), sludge oil dosing frequency is to be corresponding to temperature waving
rate, temperature slow down and sludge to be increased, temperature increasing highly
and sludge decreased rapidly also, and finally keep combustion temperature stable.
z 当炉膛温度超过(No1-50)，但是还没有达到最大设定值(No1)时，污油也会根据炉
膛温升加减频率，降温加油，升温快减油，以便使温度更加稳定。
z If the combustion chamber temperature reaches maximum (No1), sludge oil to be
decreased, and increased again upon combustion chamber temperature less than
(No1-No26).
z 当炉膛温度达到最大设定值(No1)后，将减污油；低于(No1-No26)时将会加污油。
z If the flue gas temperature reaches maximum (No4), sludge oil to be decreased, and
increased again upon combustion chamber temperature less than (No4-No27).
z 当烟气温度达到最大设定值(No4)后将会减污油；低于(No4-No27)时将会加污油。
z If the status above appears simultaneously, performs sludge oil reducing action in first.
z 上述程序中如果同时出现了加油和加油的条件，减油动作优先执行。
3.5.3.6. Post-purging and cooling 后扫风和冷却
Equals to post-purging and cooling in solid mode

等同于固体垃圾焚烧的后扫风和冷却程序。
3.5.4. Solid + Sludge oil mode 固体垃圾+污油模式
The incinerator running in solid mode first, then turn to sludge oil mode, details as follow:
首先按照固体垃圾模式工作，然后在按照污油模式工作，具体步骤如下：
z Sludge oil heating
z 污油加热
Page 38 of 188
Rev: V1.4 HSINC-50

z Pre-purging
z 前扫风
z Iginition
z 点火
z Solid incinerating, upon solid heat running out to minimum, the incinerator will turn to
sludge oil mode automatically, detailed condition of change-over as follow:
z 固体垃圾焚烧。当固体垃圾的热值已经降低的时候就会自动转换到污油模式，转换
的条件为：
Diesel oil big nozzle working
柴油大火燃烧，
Combustion chamber vacuum less than (No16-5, default 35-5=30) or
((No16+No20)/2, default (35+16)/2=25)
炉膛真空度小于(No16-5，默认 35-5=30)或者炉膛负压小于((No16+No20)/2，默
认(35+16)/2=25)
Such situation keeping no less than 5min
此种工况至少保持 5 分钟。
z Sludge oil incinerating
z 污油焚烧
z Post purging and cooling
z 后扫风及冷却
z 。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。。
3.5.5. communication protocol with computer station 与上位机的通讯协议
3.5.5.1. General description 概述
HSINC incinerator is available of RS485 communication (software version V2.0 above)

with protocol Modbus RTU. Detail connection, data setting and protocol information as follow.
HSINC 系列焚烧炉（软件版本 V2.0 以上）可通过 RS485 通信连接方式，采用 Modbus
RTU 通信协议实现数据传输。下面将详细介绍通信的连接方法、参数设置、协议格式等
内容。
3.5.5.2. RS485 Communication connection RS485 通信线连接
Twisted with shield communication cable recommended, cable model AWG26~AWG16,
Maximum transmission distance 50M. Communication cable connection as follow:
建议用户通信电缆采用双绞屏蔽线，电缆型号应选用 AWG26~AWG16，通信线的最
大传输距离为 50M。通信电缆的接线方式如下：
RS232/485 HSINC-50
SA X1-27
SB X1-28
SG
Page 39 of 188
Rev: V1.4 HSINC-50

3.5.5.3. Communication data setting 通信参数设置
z Data setting of RS485 as follow:

z 本设备的 RS485 通信设置如下：
z Baud rate
z 波特率：9600
z Data bit
z 数据位：8
z Stop bit
z 停止位：1
z Parity check
z 奇偶校验：Even
3.5.5.4. Modbus 指令说明
z Modbus station: 5
z 本设备 Modbus 站号：5
z Data initial bit: 100 (W100)
z 数据地址首为：100 （W100）
z Data bit length: 20
z 数据长度为：20
Modbus register available with order (03H), read 20 and data block on initial address 100, that
includes all information incinerator required.
可使用 Modbus 寄存器读指令（03H），从首地址为 100 的位置开始读取 20 和字的数据块，该
数据块包含了本设备所有的数据信息。
Order format as follow:
指令格式如下：
Table 3
Data initial Data length
Checkout code
Station Order address 读取数据长度
校验码
code code 数据起始地址 (Word)
站号指令代码高位低位高位低位高位低位
(Hi) (Lo) (Hi) (Lo) (Hi) (Lo)
05H 03H 00H 64H 00H 14H 05H 9EH
Data receiving format as follow:

接收数据的格式如下：
Table 4
Station Order Data
……
code code length First data Number 20 Checkout
第 1 个数据 data code
Page 40 of 188
Rev: V1.4 HSINC-50

第 20 个数据校验码
数据
指令 High Low High Low High Low
站号长度
代码高位低位高位低位高位低位
(Byte)
(Hi) (Lo) (Hi) (Lo) (Hi) (Lo)
05H 03H 28H ... … … … … …
Read data information in data block, which includes 20 byte (40 bits)
可将数据块中的设备数据信息提取出来，设备数据信息包含 20 个字（40 字节）。
3.5.5.5. Data format and description 数据格式及含义说明：

Table 5
Byte code Description
字编号描述
开关 W100 .0 PLC AD/DA failure
量数报警位 PLC AD/DA 模块故障
据 0: 正常 .1 Motor overload
1:报警马达过载
.2 Spare
备用
.3 Voltage over/low alarm
电源过压/欠压报警
.4 Flame failure
火焰报警
.5 Diesel oil pressure low
柴油低压报警
.6 Flue gas temperature high alarm
烟气高温报警
.7 Combustion chamber temperature high alarm
炉膛高温报警
8 Combustion chamber vacuum low alarm
炉膛低负压报警
.9 Atomizing air pressure low alarm
雾化空气低压报警
.10 Sludge oil pressure low alarm
污油低压报警
.11 Converter failure alarm
变频器故障
.12 Sludge oil level low alarm
污油柜液位低
.13 Sludge oil temperature high alarm
污油温度高
Page 41 of 188
Rev: V1.4 HSINC-50

.14 Sludge oil temperature low alarm
污油温度低
.15 PLC battery voltage low warning (warning, no action)
PLC 电池电压低（警告，不产生其它动作）
.0 Start order 0: No action
起动命令没动作
1: Start-up reset to 0
起动，然后自动复位为 0
.1 Shut-down order 0: No action
停止指令没动作
1: Shut-down reset to 0
停止，然后自动复位为 0
.2 Solid mode 00：No action
固体垃圾模式选择没动作
W101
.3 污油模式选择 01：select solid mode
命令
选择固体垃圾模式
10：Select sludge mode
选择污油模式
11：Select solid + sludge mode
then reset to 0
选择固体垃圾+污油模式
然后自动复位为 0
4 SPARE
… SPARE
7 SPARE
W102 .0 Running indication 0: Stop 停止
状态运行指示 1: Running 运行
.1 Burner 0: Stop 停止
燃烧器 1: Running 运行
.2 Flue gas fan 0: Stop 停止
烟气风机 1: Running 运行
.3 Sludge oil dosing pump 0: Stop 停止
污油计量泵 1: Running 运行
.4 Sludge oil mode 0: Unselect 未选择
污油模式已选择 1: Selected 已选择
.5 Solid mode selected 0: Unselect 未选择
固体垃圾模式已选择 1: Selected 已选择
.6 V2 status 状态 0: Close 关 1: Open 开
.7 V3 Status 状态 0: Close 关 1: 开
.8 Sludge circulation pump 0: Stop 停止
污油循环泵 1: Running 运行
Page 42 of 188
Rev: V1.4 HSINC-50

.9 Sludge heating 0: Stop 停止
污油加热 1: Running 运行
.10 Flame sensor 0: No flame 没有火焰
火焰传感器 1: Flame detected 检测到火焰
.11 Loading/ slag 0: Close 关闭
填料/出灰门 1: Open 打开
.12 Flue gas fan open 0: Not opening 不在打开
烟气风门正在打开 1: Opening 正在打开
.13 Flue gas damper closing 0: Not closing 不在关闭
烟气风门正在关闭 1: Closing 正在关闭
.14 Spare 备用
.15 Spare 备用
W103 Spare 备用
W104 Current combustion chamber temperature
当前炉膛温度(℃)
W105 Current flue gas temperature
当前烟气温度(℃)
W106 Current sludge oil temperature
模拟
当前污油温度(℃)
量数
W107 Current sludge oil dosing frequency
据
当前污油计量泵频率(0.1Hz)
W108 Current combustion vacuum
当前炉膛真空度(mmWC)
W109 Spare 备用
W110 Spare 备用
系统 W111 Max combustion chamber temperature
参数炉膛最大燃烧温度(℃)
设置 W112 Initial sludge burning temperature
污油燃烧起始温度(℃)
W113 Sludge shut-down and diesel accompanying burning
temperature
污油停止柴油伴烧温度(℃)
W114 Max flue gas temperature
最大烟气温度(℃)
W115 Combustion chamber temperature high alarm
炉膛报警温度(℃)
W116 Flue gas temperature high alarm
烟气报警温度(℃)
W117 Combustion chamber vacuum low alarm
炉膛低负压报警值(mmWC)
W118 Spare 备用
Page 43 of 188
Rev: V1.4 HSINC-50

W119 Spare 备用
3.6. Operation 日常操作
3.6.1. Sludge burning 污油焚烧
3.6.1.1. Sludge getting ready 污油准备
z Transfer sludge oil to sludge tank, if more water is in sludge oil, drain water after certain of
sediment; if sludge oil is inseparable by gravity, the sludge can be burnt directly.
z 将需要焚烧的污油驳运到污油柜，如果污油中有较多水分，并且能够分层，可以在沉
淀后将油柜下层的污水泄放到舱底水舱；如果污油中的水分不能重力分离，可以直接
焚烧。
z If more water in sludge, in order to preventing flame failure, disable sludge independent
burning.
z 如果水分过多，为了防止频繁出现火焰故障报警，可以选择禁止污油独立燃烧。
z Sludge burning speed is corresponding to water content, if sludge and water well
homogenized that doesn’t affect sludge burning rate, in contrary more water can take more
heat, and more sludge to be burnt; if sludge and water are not well homogenized, that will
cause flame failure, in case of this, sludge oil independent burning can be disabled, the
sludge can be accompanied burning with small diesel nozzle. For detail sludge burning
speed, please refer to chart as follow. (Standard sludge means sludge oil with 20% water),
the maximum sludge oil burning rate is prohibited by capacity of dosing pump, pipe size.
z 焚烧污油的速率与污油的含水量相关，污油中含有一定的水分，只要混合均匀，并不
会影响污油的焚烧速率，相反由于水蒸气带走更多的热量，可以少量增加污油（换算
为 100%的污油）的焚烧速率；如果污油内的含水量过多或者混合不均匀，有可能会
出现火焰故障，此时可以采用禁止污油独立燃烧，使一个小柴油喷嘴与污油伴烧。具
体污油焚烧速率可以参考下表。图中的标准污油值指含水量 20%的污油。最大污油焚
烧速率受制于计量泵容量、管路直径，不能无限增加。
Page 44 of 188
Rev: V1.4 HSINC-50
Picture16
3.6.1.2. Start-up in automatic mode 起动自动焚烧
z Open diesel oil, sludge oil, compressed air valve

z 将柴油、污油、压缩空气管路上相关的阀门打开。
Note: there is extremely forbidden for any closed valve or blind plate on diesel oil
return line, if any valve closed and blind plate on diesel oil return line, there would be
serious damage caused to diesel oil pump. Sludge oil can be heated to 75℃ is all right
for burning. Any overheat of sludge oil will aging stator more quickly.
注意：燃烧器到柴油柜的回油管路上不能有关闭的阀门或盲板，如果在回油管路阻塞
的情况下运转燃烧器会严重损坏燃烧器油泵。污油温度达到 75 度左右即可焚烧，不
要尝试将污油加热到更高的温度，否则会使污油计量泵定子过早老化。
z “Sludge” key pressed, and confirm sludge mode
z 按“污油”按钮，选择污油模式
z “Start” key pressed, incinerator starts automatically
z 按“起动”按钮，焚烧炉开始自动运行
z Upon low level of sludge tank or “Stop” key pressed, the incinerator will shut-down
automatically
z 当污油柜液位低，焚烧炉停止焚烧；或者按“停止”按钮停炉。
3.6.1.3. Solid mode 固体垃圾焚烧
3.6.1.4. Solid getting ready 固体垃圾准备
1. “Door” key pressed then open door and loading

2. 按“开门”按钮开启炉门，然后装填固体垃圾。
3. Dangerous liquids that flashing point less than 60℃ is extremely prohibited to load into
incinerator, or other dangerous explosives are extremely forbidden for loading.
Page 45 of 188
Rev: V1.4 HSINC-50

4. 不要将闪点低于 60 度的危险液体填入炉膛焚烧，也不要把其它危险物品放入焚烧炉
焚烧。
5. Glasses or equivalents are to be extremely prohibited for loading to incinerator.
6. 不要将玻璃等能够在炉膛中熔融的材料填入焚烧炉焚烧。
7. High heat material (such as oil fully absorbed rages, plastics) can not be loaded together. In
order to avoiding combustion chamber temperature high alarm, certain materials over 1 kg,
which of them needs to be mixed and arranged with low heat material,
8. 不要将大量高热量的材料（如吸油的棉纱、塑料等）集中堆放，1 公斤以上的此类物
质要与低热值的物质混放，以免炉膛高温报警。
9. Do not put oiled cotton rag on hot brick of combustion chamber, perform “Slag” during
oiled cotton rag loading, so that fully displacement of combustible gas.
10. 不要让油棉纱直接与较热的耐火砖接触，装填油棉纱时请启动“出灰”程序，以便排除
可能产生的可燃气体。
11. In order to avoiding high consumption of fuel oil, wet and un-combustible material are not
recommended loading on top,
12. 湿的、不易燃烧的材料要放在表面，以节省燃油。
13. In order to avoiding foreign solid wrongly displaced to flue gas fan and cause further
clogging of damper and flue gas fan, light material is not recommended loading on top, if
it’s necessary, please load in garbage bag, and put them on bottom of combustion chamber.
14. 重量很轻的材料不要散放在表面，需要装入垃圾袋或装填在其他垃圾下面，以免前扫
风时抽入烟道，阻塞烟气风门或烟气风机。
15. Solid garbage is not recommended exceeding 2/3 of combustion chamber.
16. 固体垃圾最多不要超过炉膛体积的 2/3。
3.6.1.5. Start up of solid mode 起动固体垃圾焚烧
z Close door
z 关闭炉门
z Check valves on diesel oil pipe line
z 检查柴油管路的阀门
z “Solid” mode selected to further confirm solid mode
z 按“固体垃圾”按钮选择固体垃圾模式
z Preset burner time, normally 90mins is enough for complete incinerating. If preset time is 0,
the incinerator needs to be stop manually.
z 设定预设燃烧时间，一般 90 分钟就可以焚烧完毕。如果预设燃烧时间是 0，需要手动
停机
z “Start” key pressed, start-up incinerator
z 按“起动”按钮，起动焚烧炉
3.6.1.6. Stop 停机
z Stop incinerator by key “Stop” pressed or preset time running out.

z 预设燃烧时间结束或按“停机”按钮停止
z Cooling down carried out automatically till combustion chamber temperature low than
Page 46 of 188
Rev: V1.4 HSINC-50

No34-No35 (default 220-120=100℃); if combustion chamber temperature less than (No34,
default 220℃), stop incinerator by pressing of key “stop” once more. If further solid
loading required, the combustion chamber needs to be cooled down completely, so that
self-burning to be avoided.
z 自动开始炉膛冷却程序，直到炉膛温度低于 No34-No35(默认 220-120=100 度)后自动
停机；如果炉膛温度低于(No34，默认 220 度)后再按一次“停机”按钮也可以马上停机。
如果要继续装填易燃的固体垃圾，需要将炉膛温度降低一些，以免在装填过程中自燃。
z Key “Door” pressed once more then open door, key “Slag” pressed once more then start up
slag mode, slag out ashes and residuals manually.
z 按“开门”按钮打开炉门，再按“出灰”按钮起动出灰程序，手动将炉膛内的残余物质清
除。
3.6.2. Solid + sludge 固体垃圾+污油焚烧
3.6.2.1. Solid and Sludge getting ready 准备固体垃圾和污油
Refer to sludge mode description to get sludge oil ready; refer to solid mode description to
get solid ready.
参照污油焚烧的说明准备污油；参照固体垃圾焚烧的说明准备固体垃圾。
3.6.2.2. Start-up 起动
z Check valves of sludge oil, diesel oil, compressed air prior to start-up
z 启动前检查污油、柴油、压缩空气管路的阀门。
z Key “Solid + Sludge” pressed, confirm solid and sludge mode
z 按“固体垃圾+污油”按钮，选择固体垃圾+污油模式。
z Key “Start” pressed, start incinerator, the system will carry you sludge heating, solid and
sludge burning program.
z 按“起动”按钮，起动焚烧程序，系统会自动执行污油加热、固体垃圾焚烧、污油焚烧
程序。
3.6.2.3. Stop 停止
Refer to solid mode and shut-down program

参照固体垃圾的停机程序。
3.6.3. Emergency stop 应急停机
Upon emergency button pressed or power supply failure, if the combustion chamber
temperature exceeds 220℃, the flue gas fan must be start-up and carry out cooling down
program. Any shut-down incinerator without fully cooling down will seriously destroy
burner. In normal condition, enable un-manned automatic cooling-down program, so that
incinerator start cooling down program without manual operation upon power resume, and
eliminate risk of further seriously damage of burner.
In emergency situation user can manually operate relay (KA4:flue gas fan，KA5:Burner), and
start-up flue gas fan and burner.
当按下应急停机按钮或出现电源故障时，如果炉膛温度超过 220℃，一定要尽快起动烟
Page 47 of 188
Rev: V1.4 HSINC-50

气风机以便冷却炉膛。未经冷却的炉膛可能会严重损坏燃烧器。一般情况下应该允许自
动起动冷却程序，以便在电源回复后、操作人员无暇顾及的情况下能够自动起动冷却程
序，避免燃烧器的严重损坏。在紧急情况下可以手动操作相应的中间继电器（KA4:烟
气风机，KA5:燃烧器马达）起动烟气风机或燃烧器马达。
Page 48 of 188
Rev: V1.4 HSINC-50
3.7 Incinerator burner operating insrucions 燃烧器风门调节说明
燃烧器风门调节器如上图所示，蓝色调节环用于设定小风门的开度，橙色调节环用于设
定中风门的开度，红色调节环用于设定大风门的开度，而黑色调节环为开度位置反馈信号。
燃烧风门开度的大小可根据现场实际的情况进行调节，黑色调节环反馈信号的开度要比橙色
中风门的开度稍大一点。
Burner damper controller, as shown in the above , blue adjustable ring is used
to set a small damper opening, orange adjustable ring is used to set the middle damper
opening, red adjustable ring is used to set the big damper opening, the adjusting
ring and black for opening position feedback signal. Burner damper opening size can
be adjusted according to the actual situation of the scene, Black regulating loop
Page 49 of 188
Rev: V1.4 HSINC-50

feedback signal of the opening is a little bigger than the orange middle damper
opening.
焚烧炉点火时的燃烧器风门为小风门，当在点火程序阶段点火失败，产生的原因可能是
燃烧器小风门的开度相对较大，可适当进行调整。
Incinerator ignition burner damper for small damper, when the ignition
application phase ignition failure, the reason may be that the burner small damper
opening is opposite bigger, can be appropriately adjusted.
当焚烧炉在垃圾焚烧程序阶段中燃烧器风门使用的是中风门，如果在这一过程中出现炉
膛温升较慢，产生的原因可能是中风门开度相对较大，空气供给量过大，带走热量过多。如
果在垃圾焚烧程序阶段燃烧器中风门开度较小，炉膛内的垃圾未被充分燃烧，可能导致炉膛
内温升较快、火焰暗红且排气管排烟较黑。
When the incinerator burner damper used in waste incineration process stage is
in the middle damper, if the combustible temperature rise slowly in the process, the
reason may be that the damper opening is opposite bigger, air supply is too large,
and too much heat can be taken away. If in waste incineration process stage small
dampre opening in the burner, garbage was not fully burning in the combustible, may
cause temperature rise fast, the flame is dark red and exhaust smoke is black.
在焚烧炉污油焚烧程序阶段温升快慢导致的原因跟垃圾焚烧程序阶段相同。如果出现喷
污油时, 炉膛短时间内负压太低，可能需要增大燃烧器风机大风门的开度。如果开始喷污油
或停柴油单独喷污油的时候出现了火焰故障，可能原因是大风门开度较大，把火焰吹灭，这
时候就要减小大风门的开度。
Burned in the incinerator sludge oil program on the causes of temperature rise
speed is the same as waste program. If there is spray sludge oil, combustible negative
pressure is too low in short time, may need to increase the burner fan big damper
opening size. If began to spay sludge oil or stop diesel oil spray sludge oil alone
when the flame failure, the possible reason is that big damper opening size is bigger,
blow out the flame, will reduce the big damper opening size at this moment.
燃烧器风门的设定和整个排烟系统的背压有关，需要根据实际情况进行调节。
Page 50 of 188
Rev: V1.4 HSINC-50

Burner damper Settings and the back pressure of exhaust system need to adjust
according to the actual situation.
型号 INC1 INC50 INC80
Type 8
小风门开度参考值（蓝色） 0.5 0-2 0-2

The small damper opening reference value
(Blue)
中风门开度参考值（橙色） 10-15 10-15

The middle damper opening reference value
(Orange)
大风门开度参考值（红色） 25-45 25-45
The big damper opening reference value
(Red)
反馈信号开度参考值（黑色） 11-16 11-16
Feedback signal opening reference value
(Black)
Page 51 of 188
Rev: V1.4 HSINC-50
Chapter 4 Control system hardware descriptions 控制系统硬件说明
4.1 Control System Input/Output Signal Configuration 控制系统输入 / 输出信号清

单
4.1.1 Input signal 输入信号
Input signal shown as Table 2
输入信号统计如下表 2：
Table 6
No. Input Description
序号 PLC 地址信号说明
Micro switch active at locked door.
1 X0
门锁信号反馈：炉门关闭时开关闭合。
Motor overload, active when any one of motors overload.
2 X1
马达过载信号：有马达过载时开关闭合。
Diesel oil pressure switch, active at normal pressure.
3 X2
轻柴油压力开关信号：压力满足时开关闭合。
4 X3 Spare 备用
5 X4 Spare 备用
Safety thermostat high temp sludge tank with steam valve active at
6 X5 temperature over set point.
污油加热温度开关信号：到设定值时开关闭合。
Flame signal from flame controller. Active at normal flame in the combustion
7 X6 chamber.
火焰信号：有火焰时开关闭合。
Over/under voltage, active at abnormal level.
8 X7 过压/欠压保护信号：高压（±10％），欠压（±10％），不在该范围时继
电器动作。
Compressed air pressure switch, active at normal pressure.
9 X10
雾化空气压力开关信号：压力满足时开关闭合。
Sludge oil pressure switch, active at normal pressure.
10 X11
污油压力开关信号：压力满足时开关闭合。
11 X12 Spare 备用
12 X13 Spare 备用
Page 52 of 188
Rev: V1.4 HSINC-50

Sludge tank low level switch, active at low level.
13 X20
污油柜液位信号：液位低时开关闭合。
Inverter fault.
14 X21
变频故障信号
15 X22 Spare 备用
16 X23 Spare 备用
Analog signal (4-20mA) from temperature transmitter flue gas.
17 CH1
烟气温度模拟输入信号（4-20mA）
Analog signal (4-20mA) from temperature transmitter combustion chamber.
18 CH2
炉膛温度模拟输入信号（4-20mA）
Analog signal (4-20mA) from temperature transmitter sludge oil temp in
19 CH3 dosage pump.
污油温度模拟输入信号（4-20mA）
Analog signal (4-20mA) from temperature transmitter combustion chamber
20 CH4 negative pressure.
炉膛负压模拟输入信号（4-20mA）
Page 53 of 188
Rev: V1.4 HSINC-50

4.1.2 Output signal 输出信号
Output signal shown as Table 3 输出信号统计出下表 3：
Table 7
No. Output Description
序号 PLC 地址信号说明
1 Y0 External alarm, contact closed at alarm condition. 远程报警输出信号(常开/常闭可选)
2 Y1 Output signal, contact closed at flue gas running. 系统运行指示输出信号
3 Y2 Output signal for opening of flue gas damper. 开烟道阀门输出信号
4 Y3 Output signal for closing of flue gas damper. 关烟道阀门输出信号
5 Y4 Output signal for start of flue gas fan. 烟气风机启动输出信号
6 Y5 Output signal for start of burner motor. 燃烧器启动输出信号
7 Y6 Spare 备用
8 Y7 Output signal for local alarm buzzer. 本地报警输出信号
9 Y10 Output signal for ignition transformer. 点火变压器启动输出信号
10 Y11 Output signal for common solenoid valve diesel oil. 轻柴油电磁阀 V1 输出信号
11 Y12 Output signal for solenoid valve nozzle 1. 轻柴油电磁阀 V2 输出信号
12 Y13 Spare 备用
13 Y14 Spare 备用
14 Y15 Spare 备用
15 Y16 Spare 备用
16 Y17 Spare 备用
17 Y20 Output signal for start of sludge circulation pump motor. 污油循环泵启动输出信号
18 Y21 Output signal for solenoid valve steam/air. 雾化空气电磁阀输出信号
19 Y30 Output signal for sludge tank heater (steam or electric). 污油加热输出信号
20 Y31 Output signal for solenoid door lock. 开炉门输出信号
21 Y32 Output signal for inverter run. 变频器运行输出信号
22 CH1 Analog output signal for frequency inverter (0-10v). 变频器频率给定输出信号
23 CH2 Spare 备用
24 CH3 Spare 备用
25 CH4 Spare 备用
Page 54 of 188
Rev: V1.4 HSINC-50
4.2 Description of Electronic and Electric Elements 电气主要元件说明

Ref: See electrical drawing
The detailed information of electronic and electric elements is described as table 4

主要电气元件的型号、规格和作用如下表 14 所示
Table 8
Name Pos. No. Function
名称位号功能
Operator panel for operation of the system. Displaying
Operator Panel
A1 for all reading of status.
人机界面
完成数据显示，参数设置，过程操作功能。
PLC main unit containing 8 digital input and 8 digital
PLC main unit output signals (relay).
A2
PLC 主单元模块 PLC 主单元模块，包括 8 点输入和 8 点输出（继电
器输出）。
Extension unit for PLC main unit 8 digital output
Extension unit
A3 signals (relay).
扩展模块
扩展单元 8 点继电器输出单元。
Analogue input module having 4 channels. Signal from
Analogue input module temperature transmitter and vacuum controller
A4
模拟量输入模块 (4-20mA)
4 通道模拟量输入模块（4-20mA）。
Analogue output module having 4 channels. Signal to
Analogue output module
A5 frequency inverter (0-10V /4-20mA).
模拟量输出模块
2 通道模拟量输出模块（4-20mA/0-10V）。
Extension unit for PLC main unit 4 digital inputs and 4
Extension unit
A6 digital output signals (relay).
扩展模块
4 点输入，4 点继电器输出扩展模块。
Extension unit for PLC main unit 4 digital inputs and 4
Extension unit
A7 digital output signals (relay).
扩展模块
4 点输入，4 点继电器输出扩展模块。
Motor over current
Protection of flue gas fan motor.
Protection F1
烟气风机手动启动器
带过载保护的电源开关
Motor over current
Protection of burner motor.
Protection F2
马达过载保护
Over current protection Spare
F3
备用过载保护备用
Motor over current F4 Protection of sludge circulation pump motor.
Page 55 of 188
Rev: V1.4 HSINC-50

Protection 污油循环泵过载保护
Over current protection Protection of primary 440V (380V) transformer
F5
控制回路主开关 circuit. 控制回路主开关。
Automatic fuse 220V (110V) control circuit protection.
F6
控制回路保险丝控制回路过流保护。
Automatic fuse Operator panel 24V circuit
F7
人机界面保险丝 protection. 人机界面回路过流保护
Contactor Start/stop flue gas fan motor.
KM1
接触器启动/停止烟气风机。
Contactor Start/stop burner motor.
KM2
接触器启动/停止燃烧器。
Contactor Spare
KM3
接触器备用
Contactor Start/stop sludge circulation pump.
KM4
接触器启动停止污油循环泵。
Main switch Isolate control panel power supply.
Q1
电源开关主电源开关。
Breaker Protection of control voltage 220v
S1
空气开关用于控制回路通断。
Frequency control for variable speed of sludge dosing
Frequency inverter
U1 pump.
变频器
用于控制污油的供给量。
Power indicator Power indicator (White or Yellow).
HL1
电源指示灯用于控制柜的电源指示（白色或黄色）。
Running indicator System running indicator (green).
HL2
运行指示灯系统运行指示（绿色）。
Alarm indicator System alarm indicator (red).
HL3
报警指示灯报警指示（红色）。
Heating indicator 污油加 Sludge oil heating indicator(green)
HL4
热指示污油加热指示（绿色）
Emergency stop button Emergency stop (red).
SB1
紧急停止按钮紧急停止（红色）。
1-phase over-/under
Monitoring of 220V (110V) control circuit.
voltage relay
K1 Relay activate at voltage outside limit setting.
单相过压/欠压保护继
当电压过高或偏低时继电器动作，产生报警。
电器
Motor for flue gas fan.
Motor 电机 M1
烟气风机电机
Motor for burner.
Motor 电机 M2
燃烧器电机
Motor 电机 M3 Motor for sludge circulating pump.
Page 56 of 188
Rev: V1.4 HSINC-50

污油循环泵电机
Motor for sludge dosing pump.
Motor 电机 M4
污油供给泵电机
Heater 加热器 R1 Heater (spare). 加热器（备用）
Control circuit transformer, primary
Transformer
T1 380/440V, secondary 220V.
变压器
电源变压器，初级：380V/440V 次级：220V
Power supply 24V DC power supply for display and PLC controller.
T2
开关电源 24V DC 开关电源
Transmitter for combustion chamber temperature.
Temperature transmitter
TT1 Sensor giving a 4-20mA signal.
温度变送器
炉膛温度热电偶温度变送器（4-20mA）
Transmitter for oil temperature in sludge dosing pump.
Temperature transmitter
TT2 Sensor giving a 4-20mA signal.
温度变送器
污油热电阻温度变送器（4-20mA）
Temperature transmitter Transmitter for flue gas temperature. Sensor giving a
TT3 4-20mA signal.
温度变送器
Transmitter for combustion chamber pressure. Sensor
Pressure transmitter
PT1 giving a 4-20mA signal.
压力变送器
炉膛负压变送器（4-20mA）
Flame detector relay Activated at no flame, when burner running.
FD1
火焰继电器火焰监测继电器
Relay Use for plc relay output.
KA00-KA32
中间继电器 PLC 继电器输出
Pressure switch giving alarm and stop of burner at low
Pressure switch diesel oil pressure.
PA1
压力开关轻柴油压力开关，当轻柴油压力低时，产生报警并
切断燃烧
Pressure switch giving alarm and stop at low
Pressure switch compressed air pressure.
PA2
压力开关雾化空气压力开关，当雾化空气压力低时，产生报
警并切断燃烧
Pressure switch giving alarm and stop at low sludge oil
Pressure switch pressure.
PA3
压力开关污油压力开关，当污油压力低时，产生报警并切断
燃烧
Temperature switch Activate at sludge oil temperature over set point.
TA3
温度开关污油温度达到预设定值时，开关动作
Level switch Level switch for stop at low level in sludge tank.
LA1
液位开关污油液位低时开关动作
Solenoid valve Solenoid common valve for diesel oil nozzle 1.
V1
电磁阀轻柴油总电磁阀
Solenoid valve Solenoid valve for diesel oil nozzle 1.
V2
电磁阀轻柴油分电磁阀 1.
Solenoid valve Solenoid valve for compressed air.
V4
电磁阀
Page 57 of 188
Rev: V1.4 HSINC-50

雾化空气电磁阀
Solenoid valve Solenoid valve for sludge oil heating.
V5
电磁阀污油加热电磁阀
Terminal end plate Terminal for site signals
X1
端子排仪表信号
Terminal end plate Terminal for motors
X2
端子排电机信号
Terminal end plate Terminal for signals of burner and solenoid.
X3
端子排燃烧器和电磁阀等信号（位于燃烧器上）
Terminal end plate Terminal for signals in the sludge tank.
X4
端子排污油柜信号（位于污油柜接线盒中）
4.3 Trouble Shooting Guide 常见故障原因分析及解决办法
Detailed information about this section shown as Table 7

本产品在出厂前已进行了严格的调试和质量认可，正常使用时不会出现故障，根据经验，
列举以下可能出现的故障原因及解决办法，供参考，见下表 7 示：
Table 7
No. Symptom Probable Cause Checkout Procedure
序号故障状况原因分析解决办法
(1) Main power supply fault. (1) Check main switch –Q1.
电源开关没有置于“ON”位检查主电源开关－Q1 手柄
置位置
(2) Emergency stop button not (2)Check emergency stop button
Power indicator not “ON”
1 released. –SB1.
电源指示灯不亮
紧急停止按键没有释放检查紧急停止按钮－SB
(3) Fuse –F6 fault. 1 的状态
保险丝－F6 故障 (3) Check fuse –F6.
检查保险丝－F6 是否完好
(1) Fuse –F7 fault. (1) Check fuse –F7.
保险丝－F7 故障检查保险丝－F7 是否完好
(2) 24V power supply fault. (2) Check 24V power supply.
Operator panel no display 24V 开关电源故障检查 24V 开关电源
2
人机界面无显示 (3) Wiring fault. (3) Check wiring improper.
线路故障检测相关接线
(4) Loose electrical connection. (4) Tighten connection.
线路接解不牢固重新坚固相关连接线
3 Alarms Described in section “3.4.2 Alarm Check the condition that alarm
- 57 –
Page 58 of 188
Rev: V1.4 HSINC-50

有关报警原因及信息请查看检查引发报警的外设
“3.4.2”
(1) Main power supply fault. (1) Check main switch –Q1 if
主开关没有置于“ON”位置 switched on.
(2)Alarm existence and not 检查主电源开关－Q1 手柄
acknowledged. 的位置
“Start” button pressed but system
报警存在或旧的报警没有确 (2) Check the alarm occurring and
not start proper
4 认 cancel it.
按下“Start”按键时，系统没有
(3) Burning mode selected wrong 检查报警并确认
按要求启动运行
没有正确选择燃烧方式 (3) Check the selected burning
mode.
检查已选择的燃烧方式
(1) Burner motor fault. (1) Check burner motor

燃烧器马达故障检查燃烧器马达
(2) Diesel oil supply solenoid (2) Check solenoid valve
Burner start but no flame valve fault. open/close properly.
5
燃烧器启动，但没有检测火焰轻柴油电磁阀故障检查轻柴油电磁阀是否打开
(3) Diesel oil supply fault. (3) Check diesel oil supply
柴油柜里没有轻柴油 source.
检查柴油柜中是否有油
System not stop while (1) Wiring fault. (1) Check or tighten wiring.
“stop” button pressed 接线错误检查连接线是否正确
6
按下“STOP”按键，但系统并 (2) Operator panel defective (2) Replace the operator panel.
未停止运行人机界面故障更换人机界面
Frequency inverter run
Described in chapter 8 Detailed see chapter 8
7 Improperly
原因详见第八章参考第八章
变频器异常
Page 59 of 188
Rev: V1.4 HSINC-50
Page 60 of 188
Rev: V1.4 HSINC-50
Chapter 6 Maintenance instruction 维护
6.1. Preventive maintenance 维护

6.1.1. Daily 每天
1. Check the combustion chamber. Remove all ash and slag after burning is finished.
检查燃烧室，移除炉灰。
2. NOTE: The combustion chamber air inlets in the bottom must always be cleaned.
注意：炉膛底部空气进口必须始终畅通。
3. Check diesel oil pressure. Normal reading 16 bar.
检查柴油压力，正常应该在 16bar。
4. Check sludge pressure. Normal reading 0.5 bar.
检查污油压力，正常应该在 0.5bar。
6.1.2. Weekly 每周
1. Clean photo resistor on burner.
清洁燃烧器上感光电阻。
2. Check that combustion air inlets and cooling air inlets are free from obstructions. Clean if
necessary.
检查焚烧炉上的空气进口和冷却口免于阻塞，有必要就清扫。
6.1.3. Monthly 每月
1. Check fan belts and tensions.
检查风机皮带的松紧。
2. Check refractory condition.
检查耐火砖。
3. Check diesel oil burner.
检查柴油燃烧器。
4. Check sludge oil burner.
检查污油燃烧器。
5. Check visually thermocouple for combustion chamber.
检查炉膛上的电偶。
6.1.4. Yearly 每年
1. Check paint work. Make sure the paint is not chipped or scratched.
检查油漆，确保没有油漆破坏。
2. Check the control and alarm system.
检查控制和报警系统。
Page 61 of 188
Rev: V1.4 HSINC-50

3. Check all safety devices and calibrate if necessary.
有必要检查所有安全和报警设备。
4. Check all valves on oil system for leakage.
检查所有阀门和油系统，防止泄露。
5. Check all oil solenoid valves for leakage.
检查电磁阀防止泄露。
6. Replace nozzles for diesel oil burner with new ones.
更换柴油没嘴。
6.2. Inspection 检查
Table 8
ITEM ACTION
项目内容
Monthly check: Check visually the refractory inside the combustion chamber. If
pieces of refractory have fallen out so the insulation or steel is visible, then use of the
incinerator must be discontinued until a repair has been carried out. Pay attention to
Combustion chamber residue on the walls. If this is over 20 mm thick, remove this by means of a wire
燃烧室 brush and a paint-scraper. Do not use a hammer!
每月检查炉膛内耐火砖，假如耐火砖一片片剥落，露出绝热材料或者钢板，请
停止使用焚烧炉，直到维修好。假如砖上结碳，请用刷子清理掉，不能使用锤
子。
Daily check: Check visually for leakage. The pressure is to be checked daily. If
pressure drops below 16 bar and cannot be adjusted by means of the adjustment
screw, clean the filter.
每天检查泄露和压力，假如压力在 16bar 以下并且调不上去，必须清洗过滤器。
To clean the filter proceed as follows:
清洗过滤器过程如下：
Diesel oil pump
Close the valves on supply and return line to Diesel oil pump. Remove all 8 bolts at
柴油泵
the end the pump opposite the drive-side. Remove the end cover and the cover
gasket.
The filter is now visible and can be pulled out without the use of tools.
Clean the filter in diesel oil and blow dry with compressed air.
Reassemble and adjust the pressure to 16 bar.
关闭泵进出口阀门，打开油泵，取出滤器，清洗后再安装上。
Monthly Check the belt looseness , if use 3kg of force deformation more than 10mm
Flue gas fan
belt will be corrected.
烟气风机
每月检查皮带的松紧度，假如使用 3KG 的力皮带偏差超过 10mm 请矫正。
Weekly check: check visually for leakage. Turn the shaft by hand to check it is
Sludge dosage
moving freely.
污油计量泵
每周检查泄露，用手转动轴，转动灵活。
Page 62 of 188
Rev: V1.4 HSINC-50
6.3. Cleaning and lubrication 清洗和润滑

ITEM ACTION
项目内容
The slag must be removed daily before starting up the incinerator. Make sure that
Ashes trash has been incinerated completely and that the fire is dead and ashes cold. Use
灰渣 a hoe for this purpose.
每天在焚烧垃圾前请先清理掉炉渣。
Photo resistor The photo resistor should be cleaned by means of a damp cloth every week.
感光电阻每周用湿布清洁感光电阻。
Caution: The main switch must be in OFF position whenever working with the
Diesel oil burner
burner.
柴油燃烧器
维修燃烧器时请关掉主电源开关。
The grease in the bearings must be changed every six months. Use heat resistant
type (ESSO thermo 30150 or equal). Make sure the bearings are completely clean
Flue gas fan and that the top half of the bearing is mounted correctly to the bottom half.
烟气风机每 6 个月更换轴承里的油脂。
Also check the tension of the V-belts.
检查皮带状态。
Door hinges Door hinges to be greased every six months. Use ordinary ball bearing grease.
门铰链门铰链每 6 个月涂上普通转承油脂。
Sludge burner The sludge burner should be cleaned every six months, if necessary.
污油燃烧器假如有必要污油燃烧器每六个月清洗一次。
Page 63 of 188
Rev: V1.4 HSINC-50
Chapter 7 Frequency Inverter Parameters Set 变频器参数设置

The inverter type is ATV-12. Parameters set shown as follows:
变频器的型号为：ATV-12，其操作说明及参数设置如下：
7.1. Parameters set list for incinerator 跟焚烧炉设备有关的变频器参数列表

Table 9
Factory
Code Function Describe
Default
代码功能描述
出厂默认值
Two line control input switch state control
Control type
TCC 控制类型
2C run or stop
2 线控制输入的开关状态控制运行或停止
Positive：Voltage is greater than or equal to
Logical input type
NPL 逻辑输入类型
POS 11v when the input activated
正逻辑：电压高于或等于 11V 时输入激活
AI1 type Voltage：0-10V DC
AIIT AI1 类型
10U 电压：0-10V DC
R1 distribute Not detect the error
R1 R1 分配
FLT 未检测到错误
Standard motor frequency
6FR 标准电机频率
50
Motor rated power
NPR 电机额定功率
0.37
Rated voltage motor
UNS 电机额定电压
230
Motor rated current
NCR 电机额定电流
1.9
Motor rated frequency
FRS 电机额定频率
50
Maximum frequency
TFR 最大频率
60
Motor control type Standard
CTT 电机控制类型
STD 标准
Given channel 1 Analogue terminals
FR1 给定通道 1
A11 模拟量端子
High speed
HSP 高速
50
Page 64 of 188
Rev: V1.4 HSINC-50

APPENDIX A Flow drawing 流程图
Page 65 of 188
Page 66 of 188
Rev: V1.4 HSINC-50

APPENDIX B Mechanical drawing 机械图纸
Page 67 of 188
6 5 4 3 2 1
800mm
D D
C C
890
500mm 500mm 1000mm
417 800mm 370
B B
SUBJECT SIZE MODEL ID PAGE

A3 10-50-00-01 2 /3
DRAWN 2012-4-25 Jason
CHECK 2012-4-18 Angel
A APPR. 2012-4-18 Matthew A
REV A.0
Email: info@hansun-marine.com
HSINC-50 ID NO
10-50-00-01
INCINERATOR 维护空间
6 5 4 Page 68 of 188 3 2 1
6 5 4 3 2 1
D D
DIESEL OIL INLET
柴油进
PN1.0 DN15 GB2506-2005
1040±5 DIESEL OIL RETURN
柴油回流
(1985)±20
900±5
(1923)±5
(1864)±10
PN1.0 DN15 GB2506-2005
760±5
AIR INLET
635±5 压缩空气进
PN1.0 DN15 GB2506-2005
SLUGE INLET
500±5 污油进
C PN1.0 DN25 GB2506-2005 C
270±5
A A SLUGE RETURN
污油回流
0 PN1.0 DN25 GB2506-2005
89±1 190±2
(1335)±20 DRAIN G1"泄放
Slangging Door Feeding Door (1233)

A-A ( 1 : 29 )
出灰门/出灰口加料门/加料口
1000±1
n540
B 4-n22 技术参数Technical requirements B
1.容量Capacity：500000Kcal/h
(1233)
2.燃烧室温度Chammber
1000±1 temperature：850～1140℃。
3.炉膛负压Nagative pressure
(2065)±30
：5～35mmWC。

A3 10-50-00-01 1 /3
DRAWN 2012-4-25 Jason
Flue gas outlet CHECK 2012-4-18 Angel
烟气出口 2012-4-18
A APPR. Matthew A
DN400 CB/T3766-1996
REV A.0
HSINC-50 ID NO
10-50-00-01
INCINERATOR 焚烧炉
6 5 4 Page 69 of 188 3 2 1
6 5 4 3 2 1
D D
1 2 4
22 1
PNEUMATIC VALVE OBLIQUE Brass 00-10-05-57
SETTING DN15气动阀
21 1 Pressure switch PSW0.2-2压力开关 SS
20 1 Check valve VNR-843-07 2" 304
C 19 1 Check valve 3/8 304止回阀 304 C
17 1 Dieser oil strainer 柴油滤器 SS 00-10-13-51
18 1 Solenoid valve DN15电磁阀 Brass 00-10-06-77
5 16 1 Pressure gauge -L压力表 SS 00-10-12-21
15 2 Pressure gauge -H 压力表 SS 00-10-12-19
14 2 Strainer DN15 滤器 Copper 00-10-11-60
15 13 1 G1/4卡套 Brass
12 1 AMICO.DN15.TEE Brass 00-03-05-03
11 1 Pre. SW -H压力开关 ss 00-10-12-18
10 1 AMICO.DN15内丝弯头 Brass 00-02-06-04
9 9 1 Needle valve 针阀G1/4" SS 00-10-08-88
8 1 WZP 热电阻 0-100℃ SS 01-01-07-01
B B
7 4 Ball valve DN15黄铜球阀 Brass 00-10-05-04
6 1 Sludge pump MONO单螺杆泵 CS 00-10-12-22
10 5 1 HSM燃烧器 AL104 39-03-00-00
4 1 Control cabinet 控制箱 S235 01-90-01-01
19 6 3 1 Door lock 门锁 ABS 00-10-08-80
2 1 Thermocouple 热电偶 CER 01-01-06-01
13 1 1 Oil tray 油盘 CS 10-50-01-30
16
ITEM QTY DESCRIPTION MTRL ID NUMBER
17 12 SUBJECT SIZE MODEL ID PAGE
3 /3
A3 10-50-00-01
11 DRAWN 2012-4-25 Jason
8 CHECK 2012-4-18 Angel
A 18 7 21 20 14 22 APPR. 2012-4-18 Matthew A
REV A.0
HASINC-50 ID NO
10-50-00-01
Incinerator 明细表
6 5 4 Page 70 of 188 3 2 1
6 5 4 3 2 1
FLUE GAS SERVOMOTER

GBB131.1E
D D
FLANGE PN0.1 AS DN400

FLANGE PN0.1 AS DN350
CB/T3766-1996 CB/T3766-1996
505
775
n495
C C
Ø381(DN350)
Ø430(DN400)
n490
n540
B B
NET WEIGHT 60Kg

298
420

A3 10-53-02-00 1 /2
DRAWN 2012-5-3 Jinyonggang
CHECK 2012-5-4 Jason
16

REV A.0
info@hansun-marine.com
FGD-400/350 ID NO
10-53-02-00
Flue Gas Dampre DN400/350
6 5 4 Page 71 of 188 3 2 1
6 5 4 3 2 1
D n490 D
FLANGE PN0.1 BS DN350

CB/T 3766-1996
n445
12-n22
C C
20
400
B B
FLANGES CARBON STEEL
NET WEIGHT：36Kg
STAINLESS STEEL BELLOWS EXPANSION JOINTS
ACCORDING TO CB/T3766-1996

A3 1B111000350020 2 /6
DRAWN 2012-5-3 Jinyonggang
BELLOWS STAINLESS STEEL 2012-5-4 Matthew
A APPR. A
REV
膨胀节 AS型 DN350 ID NO
1B111000350020
Expansion Joints AS DN350
6 5 4 Page 72 of 188 3 2 1
Page 73 of 188
Rev: V1.4 HSINC-50

APPENDIX C Electrical drawing 电气图纸
Page 74 of 188
6 5 4 3 2 1
LIFTING LUG Ø20
(2124)
20
HIGH LEVEL SW OVERFLOW PN0.6 DN 65
D GB/T2506-2005 D
1790
HIGH LEVEL SW
FOR STOP PUMP
50
SAMPLE VALVE
MANHOLE
M27X1.5 Ø1110
CONTROL PANEL
1220
830
LOW LEVEL SW
FOR STOP BURNER
STEAM INLET G1/2"

C C
660
1220
629
STEAM OUTLET G1/2" 529
780
360
DRAIN DN65 PN0.6 165
P P
340
GB/T2506-2005
110
166 0 100 155
DRAIN G1 300 401 SLUDGE TO INCINERATOR
PN0.6 DN 25 GB/T2506-2005 QUICK CLOSE VALVE AIR Ø10
RETURN PN0.6 DN 25
P-P ( 1 / 16 )
B VENT PIPE PN0.6 DN 65 B
GB/T2506-2005 (925)
GB/T2506-2005
68 790
FILLING PN0.6 DN 50
68
SPARE PN0.6 DN 50 GB/T2506-2005 NET WEIGHT: ABOUT 650Kg

GB/T2506-2005 OPERATION WEIGHT ABOUT 1620Kg
630
200
THE OUTSIDE FACE COAT THE PRESERVATION MATERIAL

OF THICK 50mm. SPRAY-PAINT AFTER GALVANIZE ZINC PLATE
OF THICK 0.5mm.
200
15°
(925)
790

A3 10-51-12-00 1 /6
200
DRAWN 2013-5-2 xiaping
(840)

REV A.2
(805) FOUNDATION DIMENSION SLT-1000NA ID NO
10-51-12-00
Standard model Sludge Tank1000L
6 5 4 Page 75 of 188 3 2 1
Page 76 of 188
Page 77 of 188
Page 78 of 188
Page 79 of 188
Page 80 of 188
Rev: V1.5 HSINC-50
APPENDIX D Standard spare parts for HSINC-50 备件清单
Item Photo Part name Description Quantity Part No.

序号照片名称说明数量编号
Fuse 2A, 250V
1 10 1H536011
保险丝 5×20
Green lamp 220V
2 1 1H5003002
绿色指示灯 Green
Red lamp 220V
3 1 1H5003003
红色指示灯 Red
White lamp 220V
4 1 1H5003001
白色指示灯 White
Relay
5 220V 2 1H5500002
中间继电器
Flame sensor
6 1 1H5451001
火焰传感器
Motor bearing of flue gas fan

7 6308 1 1B250100006208
风机马达轴承
Bearing of flue gas fan

8 SY509M 1 1B250200000509
风机轴承
V belt of flue gas fan 380V 1B601199113208
9 1
风机三角带 440V 1B601199115705
10 Burner coupling
1 23903100000A
燃烧器联轴节
Diesel oil nozzle
11 3.0gph 1 1B143240027450
柴油喷嘴
Diesel oil nozzle
12 5.0gph 1 1B143240050450
柴油喷嘴
O-rings of circulating pump
13 118×3.55 1 1B271160118355
污油循环泵 O 型圈
14 73×3.55 1 1B271160730355
15 27.3×2.65 1 1B271160273265
Shaft Seal of circulating pump

16 109-40 1 1B272160109040
污油循环泵机械轴封
Socket wrench
17 1 1B803000600001
套筒扳手
Page 81 of 188
Rev: V1.5 HSINC-50
Item Photo Part name Description Quantity Part No.

序号照片名称说明数量编号
Tool for fan impeller dismounting

18 1 1B803000600002
风机叶轮拆装工具
Thermocouple of Fan
19 800℃ 1 1J1021016
风机热电偶
Thermocouple of Incinerator
20 1200℃ 1 1J1021004
炉体热电偶
Page 82 of 188
OIL PUMP TYPE AE
GEAR SIZES 47-57-67-77-97 AE
AE - 11 - Ed 11 - August 2002
This is a general specification leaflet; for specific applications not
covered herein, contact Suntec. PUMP
IDENTIFICATION
The SUNTEC AE oil pump is the basic model incorporating a pressure (Not all model combinations are available
regulating valve. It does not have a cut-off feature, this allows purging of air Consult your Suntec representative)
through the nozzle line.
AE : basic valve
without cut-off
APPLICATIONS Gear set capacity

(see pump capacity curves)
- Light oil. Shaft rotation
- One or two-pipe system. and nozzle location
- System with RAPA in-line solenoid valve or RAPA preheater with incorporated (seen from shaft end)
A: clockwise rotation /
solenoid valve, to assure cut-off function.
right hand nozzle.
B: clockwise rotation /
PUMP OPERATING PRINCIPLE left hand nozzle.
C: anti clockwise rotation /
The gear set draws oil from the tank through the built-in filter and transfers it to left hand nozzle.
the valve that regulates the oil pressure to the nozzle line. D: anti clockwise rotation /
right hand nozzle.
All oil which does not go through the nozzle line will be dumped through the valve
back to the return line, in a two pipe installation or, if it is a one-pipe installation,
back to the suction port in the gear-set. In that case the by-pass plug must be AE 47 C 1 3 xx 6 P
removed from the return port and the return port sealed by steel plug and washer.
Bleed :
Pump series
Bleeding in two pipe operation is automatic. 1000 : standard
In one pipe operation, during the starting period, air is purged through the nozzle 7000 : with side
pressure ports
line : the by-pass hole of the nozzle plug allows air to pass to the nozzle line
without opening of the regulator valve. 2 : hub Ø 54 mm
3 : hub Ø 32 mm
For the first start up, bleeding can be accelerated by loosening the plug in a
pressure gauge port. Model number
Note : Revision number
Owing to the presence of the nozzle by-pass hole, the pump has no cut-off
Installation
function. Cut-off must be provided by an external solenoid valve (as mentioned P : by-pass plug installed in return port
in the paragraph APPLICATIONS). for two-pipe operation.
M : without by-pass plug, return plugged
for one-pipe operation.
TECHNICAL DATA
Oil under suction
Oil under pressure Pressure

adjustment To nozzle
By-passed oil
returned to tank, By-pass hole
or to suction
Pressure
Back gauge port
to suction Gear set
Shaft seal
Vacuum
By-pass By-pass gauge port
plug plug
removed inserted
Return ONE PIPE TWO PIPE

plugged INSTALLATION INSTALLATION Return Inlet
SUNTEC INDUSTRIES FRANCE - 1, rue Lavoisier - BP 102 - 21603Page

LONGVIC
83 of Cedex
188 - Tel. 33 3 80 70 60 70 - Fax 33 3 80 70 61 11 - http://www.suntec.fr
Capacity (L/h) Pump capacity
TECHNICAL DATA 150
General AE 97
100
Mounting Flange or hub according to European Standard EN 225 AE 77
Connection threads Cylindrical according to ISO 228/1
AE 67
Inlet and return G 1/4 (with facilities for conical sealing
50
on revision 5 and 6 models) AE 57
Nozzle outlet G 1/8 AE 47
Pressure gauge ports G 1/8
Vacuum gauge port G 1/8 0
Valve function Pressure regulating without cut-off 5 10 15 20 25 Pressure
Strainer Open area : 6 cm ² (AE 47/57/67) - 20 cm² (AE 77/97) (bars)
Viscosity = 5 cSt - rated speed = 2850 rpm
Opening size : 150 µm
Shaft Ø 8 mm according to European Standard EN 225 Data shown take into account a wear margin.
Do not oversize the pump when selecting the gear capacity.
By-pass plug Inserted in return port for two-pipe system;
to be removed with a 4 mm Allen key for one-pipe system Power consumption
Weight 1 - 1,3 kg (depending on the model) Power (W)
250
Hydraulic data
AE 97
Gear size Nozzle pressure range* Factory setting
200 AE 77
47 7 - 14 bars 9 bars
57 8 - 28 bars 14 bars
67 8 - 28 bars 14 bars
77 8 - 28 bars 14 bars AE 67
150
97 8 - 28 bars 12 bars
* other ranges available on request, refer to the specified range of the particular
fuel unit AE 57
Operating viscosity 2 - 75 mm²/s (cSt) 100
Oil temperature 0 - 60°C in the pump.
Inlet pressure 2 bars max.
Return pressure 2 bars max. 50 AE 47
Suction height 0,45 bars max. vacuum to prevent air separation from oil.
Rated speed 3600 rpm max.
0
Torque (@ 45 rpm) 0,10 N.m (AE 47/57) - 0,12 N.m (AE 67)
5 10 15 20 25 Pressure
0,14 N.m (AE 77) - 0,20 N.m (AE 97) (bars)
(
Viscosity = 5 cSt - Rated speed = 2850 rpm
PUMP DIMENSIONS Examples show "C" rotation and nozzle outlet.

Pumps revision 1, 3, 5 Pumps revision 2
51 51
47 42 41 39 41 39 42 51

21
74 74 Ø54 Ø32
Ø32 Ø54 Ø10,5 Ø10,5
35
35

A-A A-A
13
7 13,5 13,5

13,5 13,5
7 21 25
25 21 Ø8 63 63 Ø8
92 92
Pumps revision 4, 6
47 42 41 39 118° Suction Vacuum
gauge port
Return and
Ø8 internal Pressure
adjustment
by-pass plug
21
Nozzle

74 15
Ø32
outlet Pressure port
35 G1/4 (only for
Pressure
Inlet and Return gauge port "7000" series)
A-A with direct sealing
25
13
21 Ø8
7

13,5 13,5
for revision 5 and 6 models
(sealing with washers can also be used)
63
We reserve the right to change specifications without prior notice. Page 84 of 188 AE - 11 - Ed 11 - August 2002
626
4
OpenAirTM GBB13...1
Air damper actuators GBB33...1
Rotary version, three-position control,
AC 24 V or AC 230 V
Electromotive rotary actuators for three-position control, nominal torque 20 Nm,

operating voltage AC 24 V or AC 230 V, for three-position control, span
mechanically adjustable between 0...90°, pre-wired with 0.9 m long connection
cables.
Type-specific variations with adjustable auxiliary switches for supplementary
functions and potentiometer for position indication.
Use To control air dampers in ventilating and air conditioning plants
• using a nominal torque of 20 Nm for damper surfaces up to 4 m2, friction-dependent

• Ideal with modulating three-position controllers or ON/OFF-controls (e.g., outside air
dampers, flue gas dampers, etc.)
Functions
Basic functions
Rotational movement The actuator's rotational movement (clockwise or counterclockwise) depends on the
electrical control.
As soon as the operating voltage AC 24 V or AC 230 V is applied, the actuator starts to
turn.
Three-position control The connected damper can be operated as follows via the respective actuator control:
• Damper opens (0° ⇒ 90°)
• Damper closes (90° ⇒ 0°)
• Damper remains in the current position
Fail-safe function After uninterrupted runtime of approximately 200 s, the actuator turns off in the same
direction.
Siemens Building Technologies CM2N4626E / 02.1999

Landis & Staefa Division 1/10
Page 85 of 188
Position indication The position indicator located on the shaft adapter displays the rotational angle position
of the damper blade.
Manual override To manually adjust the actuator or the air dampers, the gear train must be disengaged
using the button PUSH". Refer to "Operating and setting elements" in the chapter
"Mechanical design".
Mechanical limitation of The rotational angle of the shaft adapter can be limited to 5° increments between 0°
rotational angle and 90°.
Type-specific
functions
Adjustable auxiliary Auxiliary switches provide supplementary functions. The switching points for switches A
switches and B (one changeover switch each) can be set independently in increments of 5° within
the 0°...90° rotational angle.
Refer to "Technical design", "Commissioning notes" and "Internal diagram".
Electrical position The integrated potentiometer can be connect to voltage as a positioner; refer to
indication "Technical data". The voltage applied is proportional to the actuator's rotational angle.
Summary of types
Operating voltage
AC 24 V AC 230 V
Standard With 2 auxiliary With 2 auxiliary Standard With 2 auxiliary With 2 auxiliary
application switches switches and application switches switches and
positioner positioner
GBB131.1E GBB136.1E GBB135.1E GBB331.1E GBB336.1E GBB335.1E
Ordering The auxiliary switches cannot be integrated retroactively. For that reason, order the
respective type that contains the desired option.
Delivery Due to various mounting options depending on the direction of rotation and shaft length,
separate parts such as the shaft adapter with position indicator and other mounting
parts are shipped separately with the actuator.
Connection cables The actuator comes with 0.9 m long pre-wired connection cables.
Accessories and The following accessories and spare parts are available for function upgrades of the
spare parts actuators; see data sheet N4699:
Accessories
• Rotary/linear set for duct mounting ASK71.1
• Rotary/linear set for wall mounting ASK71.2
• Rotary/linear set with lever ASK71.3
• Rotary/linear set with lever and mounting plate ASK71.4
• Weather shield ASK75.1
Spare parts and ordering information as per data sheet N4699
Equipment These actuators can be connected to all regulating and controlling devices with a three-
combination position output supplying a switching voltage of AC 24 V or AC 230 V.
Technical design
Motor technology The reversible synchronous motor provides accurate speed control and nominal force
monitoring to protect the actuator and dampers.
CM2N4626E / 02.1999 Siemens Building Technologies

2/10 Landis & Staefa Division
Page 86 of 188
Adjustable auxiliary switch The illustration below shows the adjustable switching values for auxiliary switches A and
(type-specific) B in relation to the rotational angle.
Mounting position for

shaft adapter/position
4636D01
+2,5°
indicator
Actuator scale:
Clockwise -2,5° 0° 10° 20° 30° 70° 80° 90° 92,5°
Setting increments: 5° 10
20
Switching hysteresis: 2° A B A
Adjustment span for 0° 10° 20° 30° 70° 80° 90° Aux Switch 40 70
Adjustment 20
switches A and B 90
30
B 40
80
50 60 70
Actuator scale: 92,5° 90° 80° 70° 60° 20° 10° 0° -2,5°
Counter clockwise
4637Z07
Setting position for
+2,5°
shaft adapter/position
indicator
Note The setting shafts for the auxiliary switches turn together with the actuator. The scales
are valid only for the zero position of the actuator (clockwise movement).
Mechanical design
Basic components
Housing Robust, lightweight all metal housing made from aluminum diecast which guarantees a
long actuator life even under extreme ambient conditions.
Gear train Maintenance-free and noise-free gear train with stall and overload protection for the life
of the actuator.
Actuator factory setting The actuator has a factory setting of + 2.5 mm which ensures a tight close-off for the air
dampers.
Manual adjustment You can manually adjust the actuator by pushing the button "PUSH".
Self-centering shaft The actuator can be fastened to shafts with various diameters and in various shapes
adapter (square, round) using just one screw due to the L&G patented mounting.
Insert the shaft adapter from either side into the opening for the shaft adapter depending
on the damper shaft length. For short shafts, the shaft adapter is on the duct side.
The shaft adapter coupling and the shaft holding are coupled via double-sided gearing.
Mechanical limitation of The limitation of the rotational angle can be adjusted in the span of 0...90° in increments
the rotational angle of 5°.
Mounting bracket A metal strip with bolt serves to fasten the actuator on the opposite side of the shaft
holding.
Electrical connection All actuators come with pre-wired 0.9 m long connection cables.
Type-specific
elements
Auxiliary switches For supplementary functions, the auxiliary switches A and B can be adjusted on the
actuator front, below the opening for the shaft adapter.
Potentiometer for A potentiometer has been integrated as positioner for the electrical position indication of
position indication the damper position.

Page 87 of 188
Setting and operating Refer to "Technical design" and "Commissioning notes" in this data sheet.
elements
10
1
9
90°
2
A 8
B 7
PUSH 6
1 Housing
2 Angle of rotation scale 0°...90°
3 Connection cable for positioner
4 Connection cable for power supply
5 Connection cable for auxiliary
switches
4626Z21
6 Gear train disengagement button

3 7, 8 Adjustment dials for auxiliary
13
switches A and B
4 9 Position indicator
10 Self-centering shaft adapter
5 11 Locking ring for shaft adapter
12 Adapter for position indicator
13 Mounting bracket
Arrangement for long 11 10

shaft adapters
9
4626Z25
4626Z23
Arrangement for short 11

shaft adapters 9
10
12
4626Z24
4626Z22

Page 88 of 188
Engineering notes
STOP
The basic system data for the control systems in use contains all engineering notes.
Read all the engineering notes before mounting, wiring, and commissioning the actuator
and pay special attention to all safety information.
Proper use These actuators must be used in a system only for applications as described in the
basic system data documents for the applied control systems. Additionally, all actuator
specific features and rules must be observed as described in the brief description on the
title page of this data sheet (bold print) and in the chapters "Use", "Engineering notes",
and "Technical data".
All paragraphs marked with the special warning triangle as illustrated on the left contain
additional safety information and limitations that must be observed under any
circumstances to avoid physical injuries or damages to equipment.
AC 24 V supply These actuators must only be used with safety extra-low voltage (SELV) or protection
by extra-low voltage (PELV) in accordance with HD 384.
AC 230 V supply The actuators are double-insulated and do not provide a connection for the protective
ground.
Auxiliary switches A, B Use either line voltage or safety extra-low voltage for auxiliary switches A and B. Do
not mix the two for operation. Howerver, operation using various phases is permissible.
Do not open the actuator!

Warning, The actuator is maintenance-free. Maintenance work may only be conducted by the
maintenance manufacturer.
Parallel connection of • Electric: Electric parallel connection for the same actuator types is permissible
actuators provided the operating voltage is within the required tolerance. Voltage drops at the
feed lines must be included. Electric parallel connection of these actuators is possible
only via relay if used with types GDB..3..1, GLB..3..1, SQE...1 or SQR...1.
• Mechanical: Do not mechanically couple the actuators.
Required actuators The quantity of actuators required depends on several torque factors. After obtaining
the damper torque rating (Nm/m2) from the manufacturer and determining the damper
area, calculate the torque required to move the damper as follows:
Total Torque = Torque Rating × Damper Area
Total Damper Torque required

Calculation of required Number of actuators = 1
actuators SF x Actuator Torque (Refer to Specifications)
1
Safety Factor: When calculating the number of actuators required, a safety factor should be included for
unaccountable variables such as slight misalignments, aging of the damper, etc. A suggested safety factor
is 0.80 (or 80% of the rated torque).
Note If the calculated number of actuators is greater than 1,

• the actuator type GIB…1E must be used
• or the damper construction must be adjusted accordingly
Sizing transformers • Use safety insulating transformers with double insulation in accordance with
for AC 24 V EN 60 742; the transformers must be made for 100% runtime.
• Observe all local safety rules and regulations pertaining to sizing and protecting
transformers.
• Determine the transformer’s power consumption by adding the power consumption
in VA for all actuators used.
Wiring and Refer to "Commissioning notes" and "Internal diagram" in this data sheet as well as to
commissioning the HVAC job drawings.

Page 89 of 188
Mounting notes
Mounting instructions All information and steps to properly prepare and mount the actuator are listed in the
Mounting Instruction guide M4626 delivered with the actuator. The shaft adapter as well
as all other individual parts are not pre-mounted as the actuator components are put
together differently depending the damper shaft length. Refer to "Mechanical design" in
this data sheet.
Mounting position Select the mounting position so that you can easily access the cables as well as the
setting dials on the front of the actuator. Refer to "Dimensions".
Housing protection In order to satisfy the requirements as per IP54, the following mounting conditions must
be fulfilled:
• Mount the actuators only vertically (cabling see below) for air dampers with horizontal
shafts.
• When the actuator is mounted directly on the damper shaft, the mounting angle my be
a maximum of +/- 45 °.
• Use the ASK75.1 weather shield for mounting in any other position.
Mounting bracket If you mount the actuator directly on the damper shaft, the mounting bracket must be
used. The insertion depth for the shaft into the housing must be sufficient and
guaranteed.
Damper shafts Information on minimum length and diameter for the damper shaft is listed in "Technical
data".
Actuator factory setting The actuator comes with a factory setting of + 2 mm which ensures a tight close-off for
the air dampers.
Manual adjustment To ensure a tight close-off function for the dampers and the exact switching position for
switches A and B, the actuator can only be adjusted with a mounted shaft adapter and
position indicator in accordance with the mounting instructions.
Mechanical limitation of If necessary, you can limit the rotational angle in increments of 5° for the entire span by
the rotational angle positioning the shaft adapter in the respective position.
Using the mounting sets The mounting sets which are used to change the rotational movement into a linear
stroke as described in "Type summary" are mounted separately.
Commissioning
notes
References All information necessary for commissioning is contained in the following:
• This data sheet 4626
• Mounting instructions M4626
• Job diagram
Environmental conditions Check to ensure that all permissible values as contained in "Technical data" are
observed.
Mechanical check • Check for proper mounting and to ensure that all mechanical settings are in
accordance with the plant-specific requirements. Additionally, ensure that the
dampers are shut tight when in the closed position.
• Fasten the actuator securely to avoid side load.
• Check the rotation direction: The dampers must be able to be moved by pushing the
button "PUSH".
Electrical check • Check to ensure that the cables are connected in accordance with the plant wiring
diagram (see "Diagrams").
• The operating voltage AC 24 V (SELV/PELV) or AC 230 V must be within the
tolerance values.

Page 90 of 188
• Functional check:
Control signal AC 24 V
– between wires 1-6 : Actuator turns clockwise.
– between wires 1-7 : Actuator turns counter clockwise.
Control signal AC 230 V
– between wires 6-4 : Actuator turns clockwise.
– between wires 7-4 : Actuator turns counter clockwise.
The actuator remains in its current position if no control signal is applied.
• Position indication by measuring the potentiometer resistance while the actuator turns
from 0...90°.
• Switch the auxiliary switch contacts "A" and "B" while the actuator reaches the
respective switching positions.
Factory settings for The auxiliary switches are factory set:

auxiliary switches A and B Switch A: Switching point at 5°
(see "Technical design") Switch B: Switching point at 85°
To change the settings of A and B, use a flat blade screwdriver to turn the switch
adjustment dials to the desired setting.
Important The angle values are valid only for the actuator position "0°" (clockwise direction).
Technical data
Power supply AC 24V for Operating voltage AC 24 V + 20 %
GBB131.1E Control signal AC 24 V (wires 1-6), clockwise
GBB135.1E Control signal AC 24 V (wires 1-7), counter clockwise
GBB136.1E Safety extra-low voltage (SELV) or
protection by extra-low voltage (PELV) as per HD 384
Protection class III as per EN 60 730
Requirements for external safety insulating transformer (100% duty) to EN 60 742
Feeder protection external max. 10 A
Frequency 50/60 Hz
Power consumption: running actuator 5VA/5 W
holding (economy function) 1VA/0.5 W (after > 200 s)
Power supply AC 230V for Operating voltage AC 230 V + 10 %

GBB331.1E Control signal AC 230 V (wires 6-4), clockwise
GBB335.1E Control signal AC 230 V (Wires 7-4), counter clockwise
GBB336.1E Protection class II as per EN 60 730
Feeder protection external max. 10 A
Frequency 50/60 Hz
Power consumption: turning actuator 8 VA/5 W
holding (economy function) 6 VA/0.5 W (after > 200 s)
Auxiliary switches for Contact rating 6 A resistive, 2 A inductive

GBB135.1E Life: 6 A resistive, 2 A inductive 104 switchings
GBB136.1E 5 A resistive, 1 A inductive 5 x 104 switchings
GBB335.1E no load 106 switchings
GBB336.1E Protection class II as per EN 60 730
Voltage AC 24...230 V
Voltage proof auxiliary switch to housing AC 4 kV
Setting range for switchover contacts 5°...85°
Setting increments 5°
Switching hysteresis 2°
Factory setting:
Switch A 5°
Switch B 85°
Positioners (Potentiometer) for Resistance change (wires P1-P2) 0...1000 Ω

GBB135.1E Load <1W
GBB335.1E maximum sliding contact current < 10 mA
Protection class III as per EN 60 730
Voltage proof potentiometer to housing AC 500 V
2
Connection cables Power supply AC 24 V (wires 1, 6, 7) / AC 230 V (wires 4, 6, 7) 3 x 0.75 mm
2
Auxiliary switches A and B (wires S1...S6) 6 x 075 mm
2
Potentiometer (wires P1, P2, P3) 3 x 0.75 mm

Page 91 of 188
Mechanical data Nominal torque 20 Nm
Minimum holding torque (with operating voltage) > 20 Nm
Minimum holding torque (no operating voltage) > 20 Nm
Maximum torque < 40 Nm
Nominal angle of rotation (with positioning indication) 90°
Max. angle of rotation (mechanically limited) 95°± 2°
Runtime for nominal angle of rotation 90°, Motor operation 50 Hz 150 s
Motor operation 60 Hz 125 s
Direction of rotation (determined by signal control at core 6 or 7) clockwise/counter clockwise
Mechanical life 105 cycles
Dimensions for the damper shaft
Round 8...25.6 mm
Square 6...18 mm
Min. length 20 mm
Max. shaft hardness < 400 HV
Actuator dimensions see "Dimensions"
Weight 2 kg
Environmental conditions Transport IEC 721-3-2

Climatic conditions Class 2K2
Temperature −32...+70 °C
Humidity (non-condensing) < 95% r.h.
Mechanical conditions Class 2M3
Operation IEC 721-3-3
Climatic conditions Class 3K5
Mounting location Inside, weather-protected
Temperature −32....+55 °C
Humidity (non-condensing) < 95% r.h.
IP-Code Housing type according to EN 60 529 IP 54
In accordance with the directives set forth by the European Union

- Conformity
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) 89/336/EEC
Low voltage directive 73/23/EEC
Product standards Automatic electric regulating and controlling devices for residential use
and other applications (Type 1) EN 60 730-2-14
Electromagnetic compatibility Emissions EN 50 081-1

Immunity EN 50 082-2
Diagrams
Internal diagrams
AC 0 V 0...1000 W AC 24 V...230 V / 6 (2) A

GBB131.1E AC 24 V (SELV/PELV)
GBB135.1E GBB13...
GIB13... 6 7 P1 P2 P3 S1 S4
GBB136.1E
(Y1)
(Y2)
(c)
(a)
(b)
(Q11)
(Q21)
100% A B
M
0%
4626G01
(Q12)
(Q14)
(Q22)
(Q24)
(G)
1 S2 S3 S5 S6
AC 24 V
AC 230 V 0...1000 Ω AC 24 V...230 V / 6 (2) A

GBB331.1E AC 230 V
GBB335.1E GBB33...
GIB33... 6 7 P1 P2 P3 S1 S4
GBB336.1E
(Y1)
(Y2)
(c)
(a)
(b)
(Q11)
(Q21)
100% A B
M
0%
4626G02
(Q12)
(Q14)
(Q22)
(Q24)
(N)
4 S2 S3 S5 S6

Page 92 of 188
Cable labeling All wires are color-coded and labeled.
Connection Wire Designation Color L&G terminal

cable labeling code
Actuators 1 System potential AC 24 V red G

AC 24 V 6 Control signal AC 24 V (0 V), clockwise purple Y1
7 Control signal AC 24 V (0 V), counter clockwise orange Y2
Actuators 4 Neutral conductor blue N

AC 230 V 6 Control signal AC 230 V, clockwise black Y1
7 Control signal AC 230 V,counter clockwise white Y2
Auxiliary S1 Switch A Input gray/red Q11

switches S2 Switch A Normally closed contact gray/blue Q12
S3 Switch A Normally open contact gray/pink Q14
S4 Switch B Input black/red Q21
S5 Switch B Normally closed contact black/blue Q22
S6 Switch B Normally open contact black/pink Q24
Positioner P1 Potentiometer 0...100 % (P1-P2) white/red a

P2 Potentiometer pick-off white/blue b
P3 Potentiometer 100... 0 % (P3-P2) white/pink c
Connection diagrams
GBB131.1E SP AC 24 V (SELV/PELV)
GBB135.1E
GBB136.1E (G)
(G0) (Y1) (Y2)

N
AC 24 V
6 7 P1 P2 P3 S1 S4
GBB13...
N Regulator or controller
Y Y Actuator GBB13...,
1 S2 S3 S5 S6 three-position, AC 24 V
4626A01
SP System potential AC 24 V
SN
SN System neutral
GBB331.1E L AC 230 V
GBB335.1E
GBB336.1E (L)
(N) (Y1) (Y2)

N
AC 230 V
6 7 P1 P2 P3 S1 S4
GBB33...
N Regulator or controller
Y Y Actuator GBB33...,
4 S2 S3 S5 S6 three-position, AC 230 V
4626A02
L Phase conductor AC 230 V

N
N Neutral conductor

Page 93 of 188
Dimensions
300
197 73
27,6
P1...P3 1,5
GCA...1
85,8
100
GBB...1
x. 95°
1...7 GIB...1
ma
S1...S6
max. 20
900 Ø 8... 25,6 mm

6... 18 mm
min. 100
Taptite
ø 5,7
230
M6 x 16
3
min. 7
10
15
67,5
min. 200
min. 60
4,2
20 13
4626M01
Dimensions in mm  1999 Siemens Building Technologies Ltd.

Page 94 of 188
6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6
D Ø160 D
449
127.5
C C
792.5
656
8 7
344
B B

9 A3 39-03-00-00 1 /6
DRAWN 2009-6-18 zhaifengjin
jinyonggang
HANSUN
CHECK
Building 60, No.1000 Zhangheng Road
A APPR. matthew Zhangjiang High-Tech Park, PuDong A
312
Shanghai 201203, China

10 REV 1.0
HSMB60T MARINE BURNER ID NO
39-03-00-00
6 5 4 Page 95 of 188 3 2 1
6 5 4 3 2 1
12 13 12 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 28 29 30
11
D D
27
26
C C
25 17
24
31
23 20 19 22 21 33 32
34
35
B B
20
36

A3 39-03-00-00 2 /6
jinyonggang
HANSUN
CHECK
REV 1.0
39-03-00-00
6 5 4 Page 96 of 188 3 2 1
6 5 4 3 2 1
17 37 38 39
D D
DIRECTION K
1 2
40
41
42
C 50 C
43
K 51
48 47 46 45 44
24
B B

A3 39-03-00-00 3 /6
45
jinyonggang
HANSUN
CHECK
A 48 APPR. matthew Zhangjiang High-Tech Park, PuDong A
12 REV 1.0 Shanghai 201203, China
49
39-03-00-00
6 5 4 Page 97 of 188 3 2 1
6 5 4 3 2 1
D D
1 2
C 70 C
86
30
70
53
52 54
55 56 57
B B

A3 39-03-00-00 4 /6
jinyonggang
HANSUN
CHECK
REV 1.0
39-03-00-00
6 5 4 Page 98 of 188 3 2 1
6 5 4 3 2 1
34 2 CROSS RUBBER RUBBER 0.003 kg 39-03-00-11

33 1 SIDE PLATE Q235 0.898 kg 39-03-00-10
32 4 WASHER GB 848-85 - 5 0.000 kg 00-04-05-01
D 31 4 BLOT GB818-85 M5x12 0.003 kg 00-10-11-28 D
30 1 BOLT PLUG PE 0.001 kg 39-03-00-09
29 1 SPLIT WASHER GB896 9 65Mn 0.001 kg 00-10-12-00
28 1 ROTATION AXIS Q235 0.163 kg 39-03-00-08
27 1 NUT GB 6170-86 - M6 0.003 kg 04-04-06-00
26 1 BOLT GB 5781-86 - M6x35 0.010 kg 00-10-11-91
25 1 LIMIT SWITCH MODULE MODULE 0.040 kg 39-03-09-00
24 3 JACKET C RUBBER 0.002 kg 39-03-00-07
23 1 WIRING BOARD MODULE MODULE 0.583 kg 39-03-08-00
22 2 JACKET RUBBER 0.005 kg 39-03-00-06
21 1 IGNITION MODULE MODULE 5.494 kg 39-03-07-00
20 20 WASHER GB 848-85 - 6 0.001 kg 00-04-06-01
C 19 10 BOLT GB818-85 M6x16 Q235 0.007 kg 00-10-11-31 C
18 1 DETECTOR FLANGE LD ABS 0.002 kg 00-10-11-40
conform to EN267 and CCS 17 7 BOLT GB818-85 M4x10 Q235 0.002 kg 00-10-11-27
16 1 DETECTOR LD PART 0.004 kg 00-10-11-39
57 1 No. 2 LABEL 0.000 kg 39-03-00-22 15 1 PLUG ABS 0.001 kg 39-03-00-05
56 1 No. 1 LABEL 0.000 kg 39-03-00-21 14 1 NUT GB923-88 M8 0.013 kg 00-10-11-98
55 1 No. 0 LABEL 0.000 kg 39-03-00-20 13 1 BOLT GB 5781-86 - M8x60 0.030 kg 04-42-08-60
54 1 NAMEPLATE 1Cr18Ni9Ti 0.009 kg 39-03-00-19 12 5 WASHER GB 848-85 - 8 0.002 kg 00-04-08-01
53 1 WARNING LABEL 0.001 kg 39-03-00-18 11 2 BOLT GB 5781-86 - M8x16 0.012 kg 04-42-08-16
52 1 INSTALL LABEL 0.006 kg 39-03-00-17 10 1 MOTOR MODULE MODULE 27.886 kg 39-03-06-00
51 2 SOFT PIPE 15 MODULE 0.005 kg 39-80-03-05 9 1 FLANGE ZL104 1.799 kg 39-03-00-04
50 1 PG21 MODULE 0.032 kg 39-80-02-21 8 1 DIFFUSER 1Cr18Ni9Ti 1.162 kg 39-03-00-03
B B
49 2 BOLT GB 5781-86 - M8x20 0.014 kg 04-42-08-20 7 1 HEAT INSULATION JPXZ100 0.174 kg 39-03-00-02
48 7 COPPER WASHER T3 0.000 kg 39-02-00-23 6 1 AIR CYCLONE MODULE 1Cr18Ni9Ti 0.284 kg 39-03-05-00
47 1 OUTLET PIPE 1Cr18Ni9Ti 0.032 kg 39-03-00-16 5 1 OIL NOZZLE MODULE MODULE 1.008 kg 39-03-04-00
46 3 SOFT PIPE 10 MODULE 0.006 kg 39-80-03-03 4 1 FAN COVER MODULE MODULE 5.036 kg 39-03-03-00
45 5 CONNECTOR GB/T3750 LL6 MODULE 0.020 kg 00-10-11-36 3 1 OIL PUMP MODULE MODULE 2.403 kg 39-03-02-00
44 2 PIPE Φ6×1 30 1Cr18Ni9Ti 0.004 kg 39-02-00-09 2 1 UPPER COVER MODULE MODULE 1.441 kg 39-03-01-00
43 1 CONNECTOR GB/T3475 LL6 MODULE 0.042 kg 00-10-11-99 1 1 FAN SHELL AL104 9.549 kg 39-03-00-01
42 1 PIPE1 1Cr18Ni9Ti 0.009 kg 39-03-00-15 ITEM QT DESCRIPTION MTRL MASS ID NUMBER
SIZE MODEL ID PAGE
41 2 CONNECTOR LL6 G1/8 MODULE 0.067 kg 00-10-11-34 SUBJECT
A3 39-03-00-00 5 /6
40 3 VALVE E121K23 0.377 kg 00-10-11-51
39 2 JACKET B RUBBER 0.001 kg 39-03-00-14
jinyonggang
HANSUN
CHECK
A 38 1 JACKET A RUBBER 0.003 kg 39-03-00-13 APPR. matthew Zhangjiang High-Tech Park, PuDong A
37 1 BAFFLE PLATE Q235 0.039 kg 39-03-00-12 REV 1.0
36 10 BOLT GB 5781-86 - M6x16 0.006 kg 04-42-06-15
35 1 CONNECT AXES MODULE MODULE 0.164 kg 39-03-10-00 HSMB60T MARINE BURNER ID NO
39-03-00-00
IT QT DESCRIPTION MTRL MASS ID NUMBER
6 5 4 Page 99 of 188 3 2 1
6 5 4 3 2 1
3.8
34
3.1
35
D D
34 3.2
58
58 1 SLUDGE NOZZLE MODULE 0.127 kg 39-90-00-00

C 35 1 CONNECT AXES MODULE MODULE 0.164 kg 39-03-10-00 C
5.1 5.2 34 2 CROSS RUBBER RUBBER 0.003 kg 39-03-00-11
10.5 1 IMPELLER MODULE 0.437 kg 39-03-06-05
10.5
10.2 1 MOTOR FLANGE ZL102 1.125 kg 39-03-06-02
5.6
10.1 1 MOTOR 1.1Kw 26.197 kg 39-03-06-01
5.5 10.2 10 1 MOTOR MODULE MODULE 27.886 kg 39-03-06-00
8 1 DIFFUSER 1Cr18Ni9Ti 1.162 kg 39-03-00-03
5.4 5.3
6 1 AIR CYCLONE MODULE 1Cr18Ni9Ti 0.284 kg 39-03-05-00
10.1 5.6 1 PRESS BOARD Q235 0.011 kg 39-03-04-05
5.5 1 IGNITION2 MODULE 0.070 kg 39-03-04-04
5.4 2 NOZZLE 4.5 0.041 kg 00-10-11-46
5.3 1 IGNITION1 MODULE 0.070 kg 39-03-04-03
B B
5.2 1 NOZZLE PLANK ZL102 0.194 kg 39-03-04-02
5.1 1 NOZZLE FRAME WELDING 0.570 kg 39-03-04-01
5 1 OIL NOZZLE MODULE MODULE 1.008 kg 39-03-04-00
3.8 1 PRESSURE GAUGE MODULE 0.078 kg 00-10-07-68
3.2 1 COUPLING ZL102 0.039 kg 39-03-02-01
3.1 1 OIL PUMP 2.162 kg 00-10-11-52
3 1 OIL PUMP MODULE MODULE 2.403 kg 39-03-02-00
ITEM QT DESCRIPTION MTRL MASS ID NUMBER
A3 39-.3-00-00 6 /6
jinyonggang
HANSUN
CHECK
REV 1.0
39-.3-00-00
6 5 4 Page 100 of 188 3 2 1
Date: 2012-5-24
Rev.: V1.0
HSMB Burner 使用说明书

Instruction manual
说明
Instruction
汉盛船用燃烧器是光机电一体化整体式全自动燃烧器，可广泛应用于船舶领域，如船用
锅炉、焚烧炉等燃烧设备。本说明书介绍了燃烧器的主要结构、安装、启动和运行、维护、常
见故障及排除方法等。当燃烧器应用在其它场合时，用户可以根据具体情况参照分析，本说明
书不再赘述。
HANSUN marine burner is the electricity integration and automatic marine burner. It
can be widely used in ship fields, such as marine boiler, marine incinerator, etc. This manual
introduces main structure, installation, start-up and operation, maintenance, trouble shooting
guide, etc. Users need to consider certain working condition, when the marine burner is installed
for other applications that not mentioned in this manual.
注意：
1. 安装前必须仔细阅读本说明书，确认了解相关规范；
2. 非专业人士不得擅自安装、开启燃烧器；
3. 本公司在不通知顾客的情况下，保留对产品的修改权利。
Attention
1. Please read this manual carefully before attempting installation, and confirm understanding of
relevant regulations.
2. Installing and starting-up burner by unauthorized person is not permitted.
3. We reserve right of product upgrating without prior notification.
Page 101 of 188

Date: 2012-5-24
Rev.: V1.0
目录
Contents
一、燃烧器的特点及应用范围
Characteristic and range of application
二、燃烧器型号说明
Type of marine burner
三、燃烧器主要参数
Main data
四、燃烧器工艺流程
Technological process
五、燃烧器运行曲线
Operation curve
六、燃烧器的外形、安装尺寸
Appearance and installation dimension
七、燃烧器的供油系统
Oil supply system
八、燃烧器主要结构说明
Main structure
1．喷油嘴
Fuel nozzle
2．燃烧器头部
Burner head
3．风门及其调节机构
Damper and regulating device
4．齿轮油泵
Gear oil pump
5．光敏管、故障红灯及控制器
Flame sensor, failure indicator with controller
九、燃烧器的安装、启动和运行
Installation, start-up and operation
十、燃烧器的维护
Burner maintenance
十一、燃烧器常见故障及排除方法
Trouble shooting
Page 102 of 188

Date: 2012-5-24
Rev.: V1.0
一、燃烧器特点及应用范围 Characteristic and applied range

HSMB 型光机电一体化船用燃烧器是一种新型燃烧器，它将燃油的供给、雾化、供风、点火、
火焰监察及运行调节控制等各部分集合为一个总体，能实现燃烧过程的全自动控制。由于该型燃烧
器在设计和结构上采取了一系列措施，符合船舶及 EN276 要求，同时具有以下特点：
HSMB is a newly designed full-automatic control marine burner. It integrates oil supply, atomization,
air supply, ignition, flame monitoring and operation adjustment controller. The design and structure of burner
comply with Marine and EN276 requirements.
Detail characteristic as follow:
1、安全可靠，全自动控制
Safe and reliable, fully-automatic control
控制器、油泵、光敏管、点火器、电磁阀、喷油嘴等部件，采用国际知名厂商 Danfoss、SUNTEC、
SIEMENS、Lucifer、Park 等原装部件，根据使用的安全要求，实现了供风、吹扫、点火、喷油、燃
烧、熄火保护、停机、再启动等全自动程序控制，完全满足船用锅炉、焚烧炉等加热设备工艺的要
求，当在运行过程其中，当过程发生故障时，即能自动停机、报警，具有良好的安全性能。
The main components are integrated from well know international manufacture, such as Danfoss,
SUNTEC, SIEMENS, Lucifer, Park, etc. According with safety requirement, it will be achieved
full-automatic control, such as air supply, pre-purge, ignition, oil spraying, burning, flame-fiilure protection,
shut down, re-start, etc. It complies with technological requirements of marine boiler and marine
incinerator, etc. The burner will shut-down and extend alarm automatically upon failure occur during
operation, safety is always considered in priority.
2、燃油雾化好、耗能少、噪声低
Fine fuel automizing, lower energy consumption, lower noise
该系列燃烧器采用进口离心式喷油嘴雾化燃油，喷油压力≥0.6Mpa，均能获得满意的雾化效果，
由于它不需要雾化介质，所以耗能少，噪声低。
The burner uses centrifugal nozzle to atomize fuel. When the oil spraying pressure is equal or greater
than 0.6Mpa, it could reach satisfied oil automizing. Media accompanying atomization is not required, the
burner characted as less energy consumption and low noise.
3、油、气配合好、火焰稳定、燃烧效率高，对环境的污染小
Oil and air mixed well, stable flame, high burning efficiency, less environmental pollution.
燃烧器同时采用旋流和直流配风，使燃油与助燃空气充分混合，获得良好的初期掺混和后期掺
混，使火焰具有良好的稳定性并且燃烧完全，符合环保对烟气排放的要求。
The burner use rotational flow and DC air distribution, which makes oil and air fully mixed, so to
achieve initial mixing and later mixing, make flame stabilized and burn completely, and accord with
requirement of environmental protection.
Page 103 of 188

Date: 2012-5-24
Rev.: V1.0
3、安装方便
Easy installation
燃烧器配有滑动式法兰，套装在燃烧头后部的风管上，只需将法兰固定到炉子上，并适当地调
节其在风管上的位置，可以将燃烧头置于炉膛内的适合位置，接通电源和油路，即可投入运行。
Burner has sliding type flange which fixed on flue pipe of the back of burner head. The flange is fixed
on the unit, after that adjust flange position of flue pipe. The burner head could be fixed inside incinerator
with suitable position. It will be started when switch on power and open oil pipe.
4、维修方便
Convenient maintenance
设计中已考虑到例行检修的需要，对于需维护的零部件均可容易拆卸、清洗、修理和更换。
The component parts can be easily removed, cleaned, repaired and replaced.
5、适用范围
Applicable scope
该系列燃烧器可以广泛地应用在船舶锅炉、焚烧炉、烘烤设备等装置。
This marine burner can be widely used on the marine boiler, marine incinerator, baking equipment, etc.
二、燃烧器型号说明 Type of marine burner

1、燃烧器型号 Burner Type introduce
燃烧器的表示方法如下：Describe method is as follows,
HSMB 60 S H
HSMB ：汉盛船用燃烧器（Hansun marine burner）；
60 ：机型规格,表示燃烧负荷 Type specification, it means range of the burner.
S : 控制方式 Control mode
S：单级 Single stage T：双级 Two stage
G：双级滑动 Two stage sliding P：比例调节 Proportional adjustment
H ：H：重油机 Heavy oil burner None：轻油 Light oil burner
2、控制方式说明 Control Mode introduce

(1)单级控制(或称一段火) Single stage control (or One flame)
这种燃烧器只有一只喷油嘴，或完全关闭，或在某一恒定的燃油流量下运行，用 S(single)
表示。
This kind of burner has one oil nozzle. The burner will be either closed or operation in a constant
fuel flow. It is showed S(single).
(2)双级控制(或称二段火) Two stage control (or Two flame)
Page 104 of 188

Date: 2012-5-24
Rev.: V1.0
这种燃烧器装有二只喷油嘴，即能在最小(一只喷油嘴工作)、又可在最大(二只喷油嘴同时
工作)燃油流量下运行，用 T(Two)表示。
This kind of burner has two oil nozzles. The burner can operate in respectively at minimum and
maximum fuel oil supply. It is showed T (Two).
(3)双级滑动 Two stage sliding

燃烧器工作在小火、大火、停机三个工况，在大小火之间的切换是平滑过度的，用 G(Glide)
表示。
The burner can operate in low flame, high flame and shut-down mode. Each stages are to be
interchange smoothly.
(4)比例调节 Proportional adjustment

燃烧器工作在最大与最小负荷之间任意位置，根据负荷需要自动调节，用 P(Proportion)表示。
Burner works in the maximum and minimum load between any positions. Burner can adjust
automatically according to load requirement. It is showed P (Proportion).
三、燃烧器主要参数 Main data

燃烧器的主要参数见表 1 所示。 Main data of the burner as followed table 1
表1
喷油量燃烧器出力电源
Quantity Power Power source 额定
马达
（Kg/H）（1Kg=10200Kcal=11.8Kw）（50Hz）控制泵压净
型功率
方式 Rated 重
*104Kcal/h Kw 220V 380V Motor
号最最 Control pump Net
单相三相 Power
Type 小大最小最大最小最大 mode pressure Kg
Single Three Kw
Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Mpa
phase phase
单级
HSMB30S 13 30 14.3 30.6 168 361 — ★ 0.55 Single 1.2 30
stage
双级
HSMB60T 16 65 16.3 66.4 190 771 — ★ 1.1 Two 1.2 45
stage
四、燃烧器工艺流程 Technological process

单级控制燃烧器的燃料流程如图 1 所示，燃烧器运行后油泵(4)起动，当打
开电磁阀(5)时，即有燃油从喷油嘴(6)喷出，当喷油量不符合要求时，可调节
油泵上的油压调节螺丝来改变喷油压力，当油压提高时，喷油量增加，反之则
喷油量减少。在调节喷油量的同时，也调节风门的开度使燃烧空气量与喷油量
相匹配，达到满意的燃烧效果。应注意燃油压力不应低于 0.6Mpa，否则雾化
Page 105 of 188

Date: 2012-5-24
Rev.: V1.0
不好，将影响燃烧效率。
The process of single stage control mode shown as Figure 1. The oil pump (4)
will be started upon burner start. Fuel oil will be sprayed from oil nozzle (6), once
solenoid valve opened. When the oil spraying quantity is not accord with demands,
user can change oil spraying pressure through adjusting screw of oil pump. When
oil pressure rises, spraying quantity increased, on the contrary, spraying quantity
decreased. To achieve satisfied burning effect, spraying quantity and damper
degrees should be adjusted simultaneously accord to stoichiometric relation. The oil
pressure should not be less than 0.6Mpa, otherwise effect of atomization is not well,
which will influence combustion efficiency.
1—油箱 Oil tank 2—回油管 Oil return pipe 3—吸油管 Oil suction pipe
4―油泵 Oil pump 5―电磁阀（安全阀、控制阀） Solenoid valve (safety valve,
control valve) 6―喷油嘴 Oil nozzle
图1 单级控制燃烧器燃料流程示意图
Figure 1 Single stage control mode process
双级控制燃烧器的工艺流程如图 2 所示，燃烧器运行后油泵(4)起动，当安
全阀(5)与第一级电磁阀(6)同时打开，第一级喷油嘴(11)开始喷油，此时风门已
按第一级喷油嘴喷油量燃烧要求调到相应的位置，在点火成功后延时一段时
间，允许第 2 级电磁阀(7)打开，第二级喷油嘴(12)喷油，同时风门开大，使助
燃空气量增加，完全满足二只喷油嘴同时喷油时所需要的燃烧空气量。开大风
门有两种方法，一种方法是，当第二级电磁阀(7)打开的同时，控制器发出信号
给伺服电机(8)，将风门开大。另一种方法是在第二级电磁阀(7)后面的管道上
装有风门油缸(9)，当电磁阀(7)打开，燃油推动油缸(9)将风门(10)开大。
The process of two stage control mode shown as Figure 2. The oil pump (4)
will be started after burner start. When the safety valve and the first stage solenoid
valve are both opened, the first oil nozzle (11) begins to spray. Meanwhile damper
is adjusted to the corresponding position according to spraying quantity of the first
oil nozzle. The second oil nozzle (12) is allowed opening and spraying after ignition
for a period of time. Meanwhile the damper is opened more widely, so that
combustion air is increased. It provides combustion air quantity of two oil nozzles
Page 106 of 188

Date: 2012-5-24
Rev.: V1.0
requirement adequately. There have two method of opening the damper: 1. When
the second stage solenoid valve (7) opened, the controller sends signal to servo
motor (8) to open damper more widely. 2. When the second stage solenoid valve (7)
opened, oil pushes cylinder (9), which is fixed on the pipe behind solenoid valve (7),
to open damper more widely.
1—油箱 Oil tank 2—回油管 Oil return pipe 3—吸油管 Oil suction pipe 4—油泵 Oil pump 5—安
全阀 Safety valve 6—第一级电磁阀 The first stage solenoid valve 7—第二级电磁阀 The second stage solenoid
valve 8—伺服电机 Servo motor 9—油缸 Cylinder 10—风门 Damper 11—第一级喷油嘴 The first stage oil
nozzle 12—第二级喷油嘴 The second stage oil nozzle
图 2 双级控制燃烧器工艺流程示意图
Figure 2. Two stage control mode process
五、燃烧器运行曲线 Burner operation curve

由于燃烧器加热的对象和使用场合不同，所以炉膛的压力也不同，当燃烧
器的背压(即炉膛压力)提高时，风机输出的风量减少，此时必须降低喷油压力，
或换较小的喷油嘴来减少喷油量，以使燃油流量与风量相匹配，背压越高，风
机的供风能力越小，燃烧器的燃烧能力就越小，当背压升到某一数值时，供风
量将急剧减少，此时点火及燃烧情况急剧恶化，无论再减少喷油量也不能保证
燃烧正常，甚至熄灭，因此燃烧器只能在一定的范围内运行。图 3 为 HSMB
型柴油燃烧器的运行曲线，曲线所包围的区域为燃烧器能正常运行的范围，曲
线外燃烧器将不能正常工作，对相同喷油量的燃烧器来说，不论其控制方式，
喷雾锥角，型式如何，其运行曲线是相同的，故图 3 中用了简化的表示方法。
The chamber pressure is varying as different situations of burner used. When
the backpressure (it means chamber pressure) increased, the fan output decreased.
For that case, the spraying pressure should be reduced or a smaller oil nozzle be
replace to make the fuel flow match the airflow. The more back pressure increased,
the less airflow fan supplied. So the combustion ability becomes lower. When back
pressure rised to certain quantity, the fan flux reduced sharply. At the time the
igniting and burning conditions become worse, no matter how to reduce spraying
quantity will not operate normally, even blow out. So burner should be operated in
Page 107 of 188

Date: 2012-5-24
Rev.: V1.0
a certain range. Figure 3 showed the burner operation curve of HSMB type. The
range of normal operation is surrounded by curve. The peripheral area of curve is
improper operation range. The operation curves of same spraying burner are
identical, no matter how the control mode, the spray cone angle or the type were.
So Figure 3 is shown with simplified method.
图 3 HSMB30S HSMB60T 燃烧器的运行曲线

Figure 3 Burner operation curve of HSMB30S HSMB60T
六、燃烧器的外形、安装尺寸 Appearance and installation dimensions

燃烧器的外形及安装尺寸如图 4 及表 2 所示。
The appearance and installation dimensions of the burner are shown as Figure 4
and Table 2.
图上还给出了锅炉安装孔尺寸图，锅炉上的开孔尺寸 ØN 应稍大于燃烧头
的直径 ØE，以便燃烧器的安装，锅炉上的螺孔距离 L 应与安装法兰上的开孔
相一致。
Figure 4 also showed the installation dimension of holes for boiler. The cutout
ØN on boiler should be larger than diameter ØE of the burner head, for easily
installed. The distance L of screw holes on boiler should match with the holes on
the flange.
外型及安装尺寸图：Appearance and installation dimension drawings:
Page 108 of 188

Date: 2012-5-24
Rev.: V1.0
图 4(a)HSMB30S Figure 4 (a) HSMB30S
图 4(b) HSMB60T Figure 5 (b) HSMB60T
HSMB30 HSMB60
安装尺寸表： Installation dimension list

表 2 Table 2
D
型号
A A1 A2 B B1 B2 C E F L M N
Type 最小最大
Min. Max.
HSMB30 485 235 250 354 264 90 710 105 300 134 114 138 M10 150
HSMB60 656 312 344 449 339 110 656 127.5 160 186 M10 165
Page 109 of 188

Date: 2012-5-24
Rev.: V1.0
七、燃烧器的供油系统 Oil supply system

燃烧器的供油系统有三种。Oil supply systems have three types.
1、油箱底部供油系统 Oil supply system from tank bottom
图 5 给出了油箱底部供油的系统图，表 3 给出了该系统推荐使用的管子内
径及吸油管的长度。
Figure 5 showed the oil supply system of oil tank bottom. The recommended
pipe diameter and oil suction pipe length are shown in table 3.
1.油箱 Oil tank 2.供油管 Oil supply pipe 3.过滤器 Filter 4.油泵 Oil pump
5.脱气器 Degasser 6.吸油管 Oil suction pipe 7.回油管 Oil return pipe
8.燃油自动切断装置 Automatically shut off device 9.单向阀 Non-return valve
图5 油箱底部供油系统 Figure 5 Oil supply system of oil tank bottom
表3 Table 3
油平面与油泵轴线之间的距离吸油管的总长度 Length of oil suction pipe
Distance from oil plane to oil L(m)
pump axis HSMB30 HSMB60
H（m）
di=10mm di=14mm
1 ≤30 ≤30
1.5 ≤35
2.0 ≤35 ≤35
2.5 ≤40
3.0 ≤40 ≤40
4.0 ≤45
注 1)当吸油管上有弯头或阀门时，每个应使吸油管的长度减去 0.25 米。
注 2)di 为推荐的吸油管及回油管的内径。
Notice: 1. If oil suction pipe have bends or valves, the distance should be 0.25 meter short.
2. “di” means inner diameter of recommended oil suction pipe and oil return pipe.
Page 110 of 188

Date: 2012-5-24
Rev.: V1.0
2、油箱顶部供油系统 Oil supply system from tank top

图 6 和表 4 给出了油箱顶部供油系统图及推荐使用的吸油管和回油管内径。
Figure 6 showed the oil supply system from tank bottom. The recommended inner diameter
of oil suction pipe and oil return pipe are shown in table 4.
1.油箱 Oil tank 2.吸油阀 Oil suction valve 3.回油管 Oil return pipe
4.吸油管 Oil suction pipe 5.过滤器 Filter 6.油泵 Oil pump
7.单向阀 Non-return valve 8.燃油自动切断装置 Automatically shut off device
图6 油箱顶部供油系统 Figure 6 Oil supply system from tank top

表4 Table 4
吸油管的总长度
油平面与油泵轴线之间 Length of oil suction pipe
的距离 L(m)
Distance from oil plane
to oil pump axis HSMB30 HSMB60 HSMB100～120
H（m） di=10mm di=14mm di=16mm
1.0 ≤30 ≤30 ≤40

1.5 ≤35 ≤45
2.0 ≤35 ≤35 ≤45
2.5 ≤40 ≤50
3.0 ≤40 ≤40 ≤50
注 1)当吸油管上有弯头或阀门时，每个应使用吸油管的长度减去 0.25 米。
注 3)P≤3.5 米。
Notice: 1. If oil suction pipe have bends or valves, the distance should be 0.25 meter short.
3. P≤3.5M
3、吸油供给系统 Oil absorption supply system
图 7 和表 5 给出了吸油供给系统图及该系统推荐使用的吸油管及回油管内径。
The supply system is shown as Figure 7. The recommended inner diameter of
Page 111 of 188

Date: 2012-5-24
Rev.: V1.0
oil section pipe and oil return pipe are shown in Table 5.
1.油箱 Oil tank 2.吸油阀 Oil section valve 3.回油管 Oil return pipe
4.吸油管 Oil suction pipe 5.过滤器 Filter 6.油泵 Oil pump
图7 吸油供给系统 Figure 7 Oil absorption supply system
表 5 Table 5
吸油管的总长度
Length of oil suction pipe
油平面与油泵轴线之间 L(m)
的距离
HSMB 30 HSMB 60 HSMB 100～120
Distance from oil plane
to oil pump axis
di(mm)
H(m)
10 12 14 16 16 18
0.5 ≤26 ≤54 ≤26 ≤45 ≤36 ≤55
1.0 ≤24 ≤47 ≤22 ≤38 ≤30 ≤48
1.5 ≤18 ≤38 ≤19 ≤31 ≤25 ≤41
2.0 ≤14 ≤30 ≤14 ≤25 ≤20 ≤32
2.5 ≤10 ≤23 ≤11 ≤19 ≤15 ≤24
3.0 ≤6 ≤15 ≤7 ≤12 ≤10 ≤15

注 1)当吸油管上有弯头或阀门时，每个应使用吸油管的长度减去 0.25 米。
Notice: 1.if oil suction pipe have bends or valves, the distance should be 0.25 meter short.
为了使整个燃油系统运行良好，建议采用表(3～5)推荐的吸油管及回油管
直径，且吸油管的长度不得超过表列中的数据。油管最好用铜管，也可采用相
同直径的钢管，管内必须保证清洁。
Page 112 of 188

Date: 2012-5-24
Rev.: V1.0
Table 3~5 shown the suggested dimension for oil suction pipe and oil return
pipe, for well operation of system. The length of oil suction pipe must be less than
the data in the tables. Oil pipe should use copper pipe, or steel tube with the same
diameter. And the inside of the pipe must be clear.
所有的燃油系统应是气密的，防止空气漏入供油系统影响油泵和燃烧器的
正常运行。吸油管应向燃烧器方向向上倾斜，避免形成气泡。当在一个锅炉房
内有多个燃烧器时，每一个燃烧器应有单独的吸油管，回油管可以共用一根回
油管，再回到油箱，总回油管应有与回油量相适应的截面积。为确保可靠和安
静的运行状态，在油泵吸入口的真空度不应超过-40KPa。
All type of oil supply system should be well tightened no leaking, for
preventing air leak into the system. The oil suction pipe should be tilted upward
burner, for avoid to generate bubble. When multi burners are fixed in one boiler,
each burner should have its own oil suction pipe, but burners can share oil return
pipe to oil tank. The sectional area of the total return pipe should match the amount
of oil returned. The vacuum quantity of oil pump inlet should be less than -40KPa,
for ensure reliable and quiet operation.
八、燃烧器主要结构说明 Main structure

1、喷油嘴 Oil nozzle
喷油嘴是燃烧器最关键的部件，它的工作好坏直接影响燃烧器的运行情况
和出力，HSMB 型燃烧器采用高压离心雾化式喷油嘴，这种喷油嘴在喷油压力
≥0.6MPa 时就能得到良好的雾化，随着喷油压力的提高雾化质量也不断改善，
同时喷油量增加，反之喷油压力降低，雾化质量降低，喷油量减少。
The oil nozzle is the most important parts of the burner, the nozzle working
well or not, that more affects the operation and output of the burner. The HSMB
burner uses high-pressure centrifugal oil nozzle. This kind of nozzle can achieve
well atomization when the spray pressure is higher than 0.6MPa. With the spray
pressure increased, atomization quality improved and spray quantity increased.
With the spray pressure decreased, the atomization quality and spray quantity
decreased.
Page 113 of 188

Date: 2012-5-24
Rev.: V1.0
1.喷油嘴外壳 Oil nozzle shield 2.旋流雾化锥体 Hydrocyclone atomization cone

3.压紧螺盖 Clamping screw cover 4.滤油网 Oil screen
图8 喷油嘴结构示意图 Figure 8 Oil nozzle structure drawing
在同样的喷油压力下，规格较小的喷油嘴可以获得较好的雾化质量。喷油
嘴由喷油嘴外壳(1)、旋流雾化锥体(2)、压紧螺盖(3)、和滤油网(4)组成(见图 8)。
喷油嘴外壳(1)的端面 A 是密封面，任何轻微的划痕和碰伤均会引起燃油的滴
漏，应十分注意保护。喷油嘴外壳上的喷油孔和旋流雾化锥体(2)上的斜槽是保
证燃油雾化质量，雾化锥角和喷油量的关键，应保证尺寸准确和表面干净，任
何损坏、变形和污垢都会严重影响喷油嘴以及燃烧器的正常工作，因此应定期
清洗和更换。压紧螺盖(3)应紧压在雾化器头(2)上，否则会影响燃油雾化效果
和喷油量。滤油网(4)用来过滤燃油，防止杂质进入喷油嘴，影响喷油嘴的正常
工作，它应由 200 目⁄吋的滤网制成，应保持滤油网(4)的清洁和完整。
Under the same spray pressure, the smaller specification nozzle achieves
better atomization quality. Oil nozzle consists of oil nozzle shield (1), hydrocyclone
atomization cone (2), clamping screw cover (3) and oil screen (4). The head face A
of the nozzle is sealing surface, which need to be protected carefully, for any slight
scratches and bruising would induce the oil leaking. The spray hole on oil nozzle
shield and hydrocyclone atomization cone (2) guarantee the oil atomization quality,
atomization angle and spray quantity, for these two parts, precise size and clean
surface are essential. They need to be cleaned and replaced at fixed periods, because
any damage, transformation or fouling will impact oil nozzle and burner operation.
The clamping screw cover should be fixed on the above atomization cone (2) firmly,
otherwise will affect atomization effect and spray quantity. The oil screen’s function
is oil filtering, to prevent impurities into oil nozzle, which makes nozzle
unworkable. The oil screen (4) is made from 200 meshes per inch filter screen. It
should be kept clean and complete.
表 6 给出了喷油量(Kg/h)与油泵压力(MPa)与喷油嘴规格(usgal)之间的关
系，可以看到，随着油泵压力的增加和喷油嘴规格的增大，喷油量不断增加。
根据燃烧器使用的喷油嘴规格和设定的油泵压力，从表 6 中即可找到其喷油量，
并计算出燃烧器对应的出力(kw)。
Table 6 shows the relationship of spray quantity (Kg/h), oil pump pressure
(MPa) and oil nozzle specification. The spray quantity increase with oil pump
pressure and oil nozzle specification increased. According with the oil nozzle
specification of burner and oil pump set pressure, spray quantity can be found from
table 6 and burner power (kw) can be calculated.
表6 Table 6
Page 114 of 188

Date: 2012-5-24
Rev.: V1.0
喷油嘴油泵压力 Oil pump pressure *0.1（MPa）喷油嘴

Oil nozzle Oil nozzle
(Usgal) 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 (Usgal)
0.40 1.18 1.27 1.36 1.44 1.52 1.59 1.67 1.73 1.80 1.86 1.92 1.98 2.04 2.10 2.15 2.20 0.40
0.50 1.47 1.59 1.70 1.80 1.90 1.99 2.08 2.17 2.25 2.33 2.40 2.48 2.55 2.62 2.69 2.75 0.50
0.60 1.77 1.91 2.04 2.16 2.28 2.39 2.50 2.60 2.70 2.79 2.88 2.97 3.06 3.14 3.22 3.30 0.60
0.65 1.91 2.07 2.21 2.34 2.47 2.59 2.71 2.82 2.92 3.03 3.12 3.22 3.31 3.41 3.49 3.58 0.65
0.75 2.20 2.38 2.55 2.70 2.85 2.99 3.12 3.25 3.37 3.49 3.61 3.72 3.82 3.93 4.03 4.13 0.75
0.85 2.50 2.70 2.89 3.06 3.23 3.39 3.54 3.68 3.82 3.96 4.09 4.21 4.33 4.45 4.57 4.68 0.85
1.00 2.94 3.18 3.40 3.61 3.80 3.99 4.16 4.33 4.50 4.65 4.81 4.96 5.10 5.24 5.37 5.51 1.00
1.10 3.24 3.50 3.74 3.97 4.18 4.38 4.58 4.77 4.95 5.12 5.29 5.45 5.61 5.76 5.91 6.06 1.10
1.20 3.53 3.82 4.08 4.33 4.56 4.78 5.00 5.20 5.40 5.59 5.77 5.95 6.12 6.29 6.45 6.61 1.20
1.25 3.68 3.97 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00 5.20 5.40 5.60 5.80 6.00 6.20 6.35 6.55 6.70 6.85 1.25
1.35 3.97 4.29 4.59 4.87 5.13 5.38 5.62 5.85 6.07 6.28 6.49 6.69 6.88 7.07 7.26 7.44 1.35
1.50 4.42 4.77 5.10 5.41 5.70 5.90 6.24 6.50 6.75 6.98 7.21 7.43 7.65 7.86 8.06 8.26 1.50
1.65 4.86 5.25 5.61 5.95 6.27 6.58 6.87 7.15 7.42 7.68 7.93 8.18 8.41 8.64 8.87 9.09 1.65
1.75 5.15 5.56 5.95 6.31 6.65 6.98 7.29 7.58 7.87 8.15 8.41 8.67 8.92 9.17 9.41 9.64 1.75
2.00 5.89 6.30 6.80 7.21 7.60 7.97 8.33 8.67 8.99 9.31 9.61 9.91 10.20 10.48 10.75 11.01 2.00
2.25 6.62 7.15 7.65 8.15 8.55 8.97 9.37 9.75 10.12 10.47 10.85 11.15 11.47 11.79 12.09 12.39 2.25
2.50 7.36 7.95 8.50 9.01 9.50 9.97 10.41 10.83 11.24 11.64 12.02 12.39 12.75 13.10 13.44 13.77 2.50
3.00 8.83 9.54 10.20 10.82 11.40 11.96 12.49 13.00 13.49 13.96 14.42 14.87 15.30 15.72 16.12 16.52 3.00
3.50 10.30 1.13 11.90 12.62 13.30 13.95 14.57 15.17 15.74 16.29 16.83 17.34 17.85 18.34 18.81 19.28 3.50
4.00 11.77 12.72 13.60 14.42 15.20 15.94 16.65 17.33 17.99 8.62 19.23 19.82 20.40 20.95 21.50 22.03 4.00
4.50 13.25 14.31 15.30 16.22 17.10 17.94 18.73 19.50 20.24 20.95 21.63 22.30 22.95 23.57 24.19 24.78 4.50
5.00 14.72 15.90 17.00 18.03 19.00 19.93 20.82 21.67 22.48 23.27 24.04 24.78 25.49 26.19 26.87 27.54 5.00
5.50 16.19 17.49 18.70 19.83 20.90 21.92 22.90 23.83 24.73 25.60 26.44 27.25 28.04 28.81 29.56 30.29 5.50
6.00 17.66 19.00 20.40 21.63 22.80 23.92 24.98 26.00 26.98 27.93 28.84 29.73 30.59 31.43 32.25 33.04 6.00
6.50 19.13 20.67 22.10 23.44 23.70 25.91 27.06 28.17 29.23 30.26 31.25 32.21 33.14 34.05 34.94 35.80 6.50
7.00 20.60 22.26 23.79 25.24 26.60 27.90 29.14 30.33 31.48 32.58 33.65 34.69 35.69 36.67 37.62 38.55 7.00
7.50 22.07 23.85 25.49 27.04 28.50 29.90 31.22 32.50 33.73 34.91 36.05 37.16 38.24 39.29 40.31 41.31 7.50
8.30 24.43 26.39 28.21 29.93 31.54 33.08 34.55 35.97 37.32 38.63 39.90 41.13 42.32 43.48 44.61 45.71 8.30
9.50 27.96 30.21 32.29 34.25 36.10 37.87 39.55 41.17 42.72 44.22 45.67 47.07 48.44 49.77 51.06 52.32 9.50
10.5 30.90 33.39 35.69 37.86 40.06 41.73 43.74 45.41 47.20 48.90 50.50 52.00 53.50 55.00 56.40 57.80 10.5
12.0 35.32 38.20 40.80 43.30 45.60 47.80 50.00 52.00 54.00 55.90 57.70 59.50 61.20 62.90 64.50 66.10 12.0
13.8 40.62 43.90 46.90 49.80 52.40 55.00 57.50 59.80 62.10 64.20 66.30 68.40 70.40 72.30 74.30 76.00 13.8
15.3 45.03 48.60 52.00 55.20 58.10 60.00 63.70 66.30 68.80 71.10 73.60 75.80 78.00 80.20 82.20 84.30 15.3
17.5 51.51 55.60 59.50 63.10 66.50 69.80 72.90 75.80 78.70 81.50 84.10 86.70 89.20 91.70 94.10 96.40 17.5
19.5 57.40 62.00 66.30 70.30 74.10 77.70 81.20 84.50 87.70 90.80 93.70 96.60 99.40 102.2 104.8 107.4 19.5
21.5 63.20 68.40 73.10 77.50 81.70 85.70 89.50 93.20 96.70 100.1 103.4 106.5 109.6 112.6 115.6 118.4 21.5
24.0 70.64 76.30 81.60 86.50 91.20 95.70 99.90 104.0 107.9 111.7 115.4 118.9 122.4 125.7 129.0 132.2 24.0
28.0 82.41 89.00 95.20 101.0 106.4 111.6 116.6 121.3 125.9 130.3 134.6 138.7 142.8 146.7 150.5 154.2 28.0
30.0 88.30 95.40 102.0 108.2 114.0 119.6 124.9 130.0 134.9 139.6 144.2 148.7 153.0 157.2 161.2 165.2 30.0
喷油量 Pray quantity（kg/h）
1kw=860kcal/h
Page 115 of 188

Date: 2012-5-24
Rev.: V1.0
轻油密度=0.82/0.83 热值=10150kcal/kg 重油密度(7.9°E)=0.97/0.98 热值=9650kcal/kg

Light oil density Calorific value Heavy oil density Calorific value
2 燃烧器头部 Burner head

燃烧器的头部是燃烧器实现喷油雾化、点火、稳定火焰燃烧的部分，它
由燃烧头(1)、旋流器(2)、喷油嘴(3)、点火电极(4)、风管(5)等组成见图 9(a)，
9(b)。从风机送来的助燃空气由风管进入燃烧器头部，在流入燃烧头锥体时分
为二部分，第一部分经旋流器时发生旋转，它首先与燃油混合燃烧，在燃烧头
内形成一个高温烟气的回流区，它对稳定火焰起着极为关键的作用，当经过旋
流器的空气占助燃空气的比例越高，则火焰的稳定性越好，燃烧时的火焰也较
短；第二部分空气经旋流器外缘与燃烧头锥体之间的环形通道流入燃烧头内，
然后与回流区后部的燃油进一步混合燃烧、由于燃烧头的容积较小、长度也很
短，因此只有少量的燃油在其内燃烧，其余的燃油一方面与助燃空气混合，一
方面喷入锅炉燃烧室内继续完成燃烧，形成一定长度的火焰，满足燃烧加热
设备的需要。
The burner head is used for oil atomization, igniting and stabilized flame.
Burner head (1) consists of combustion head (2), oil nozzle (3), ignition electrode (4)
and flue pipe (5), as shown in Figure 9(a), 9(b). Combustion air sent by fan enters
into burner head from flue pipe. The combustion air was split into two parts when
sent into the cone. One parts of the combustion air is rotated through the swirler,
and mixed with oil to burn, which would generate a high temperature recirculation
area in the burner head, this makes flame stable. The flame is more stable and
shorter when the ratio of the combustion air through the swirler is higher. The other
combustion air entered the burner head through the channel ring between the
outside of the swirler and burner cone, and mixed with the fuel oil in the
recirculation region. The volume of the burner head is smaller and the length is
short, so only a small amount of oil burned in the burner head. The rest of the oil
mixed with the air and injected into the boiler chamber, where the mixture are
burning and forming a certain length flame, to meet the needs of the heating
equipment.
（2）旋流器、喷油嘴、点火棒相对关系。
Relative relations with swirler, oil nozzle and ignition stick
点火电极(4)与旋流器(2)的相对位置很重要(见图 9)，它所产生的电火花须
处在可燃气体的范围之内，并且那里气体的流速不能过高，否则不易点燃火焰，
表 7(a)、7(b)、7(c)给出了推荐的点火电极的相对位置及电极间的距离。
The relative position between ignition electrode (4) and swirler (2) is very
important. The electric spark should be in the range of the combustible gas. And the
Page 116 of 188

Date: 2012-5-24
Rev.: V1.0
gas flower rate should not be too high to ignite. The suggested relative position and
distance between ignition electrodes are shown as Table 7(a) and 7(b).
1.燃烧头 Burner head 2.旋流器 Swirler 3.喷油嘴 Oil nozzle 4.点火电极 Ignite electrode
5.送风短管 Air supply short tube
图 9(a) 燃烧器头部(单级控制)
Figure 9(a) Burner head (Single stage)
单级控制点火电极的相对位置表 7(a)
Electrode relative position (Single stage) Table 7(a)
点火电极的燃烧器型号
相对位置 Type
Electrode
relative position HSMB 15S HSMB 20S～30S HSMB 35S
(mm)
A 1 1 1
B 9～10 9～10 10～15
C 19 21 21
D 2～3 2～3 2～3
E 5.5～6 5～6 5～6
Page 117 of 188

Date: 2012-5-24
Rev.: V1.0
1.燃烧头 Burner head 2.旋流器 Swirler 3.喷油嘴 Oil nozzle

4.点火电极 Ignite electrode 5.送风短管 Air supply short tube
图 9(b) 燃烧器头部(双级控制)
Figure 9(b) Burner head (Two stage)
双级控制点火电极的相对位置表 7(b)
Electrode relative position (Two stages) Table 7(b)
点火电极的燃烧器型号
相对位置 Type
Electrode relative
position HSMB60T HSMB 75T HSMB 100T
(mm)
A 1.5 0 1.5
B 19.5 21 19.5
C 12 12 15
D 2～3 2～3 2～3
E 7.5～8.5 7.5～8.5 7.5～8.5

注：以上值为近似值，可根据实际情况进行调整。
Note: These are approximate values, which can be adjusted according to the practical situation.
（2）旋流器与燃烧头锥体相对关系 Relative position between swirler and

burner cone
调节旋流器在燃烧头锥体内的位置，可以改变旋流风与直流风的配比关
系。当旋流器的位置靠燃烧头锥体前部时，直流风增加，旋流风减少，空气与
燃油的混合速度变慢，火焰较长，火焰稳定性较差(见图 10(a))，当旋流器的位
置靠燃烧头的后部时(见图 10(b))，直流风减少，旋流风增加，空气与燃油的混
Page 118 of 188

Date: 2012-5-24
Rev.: V1.0
合速度加快，火焰变短，同时火焰的稳定性提高。出厂时，一般将旋流器放置
在其可以调范围的中间。
Adjust swirler position within burner cone to change ratio relation between the
swirled air and the direct air. When the swirler is located in the front of the burner
cone, the direct air will be increased and the swirled air will be decreased. So that
the mixing speed between air and oil will be slow down. And the flame is too long,
and then the flame stability will be worse. When the swirler is located in the back of
the burner head, the direct air will be decreased and the swirled air will be increased.
So that the mixing speed between air and oil will be quicker. And the flame
becomes short to make flame stability better. The swirler is placed in the middle of
the range when out of factory.
燃烧头位置的调节还必须与风门的调节相适应，一般不应将风门关死，而
要保持一定的开度(图 10)。
The burner position adjustment must fit with damper adjustment. The damper
should never be closed off, it should keep certain angle. (Figure 10)
图 10 燃烧头的调节与风门的关系
Figure 10 Relative positions between swirler and burner cone
3、风门及其调节机构 Damper and its adjustment formation

风门用来调节进入燃烧器的风量，风门的调节有三种方法：
Damper adjusts the blowing rate into the burner. There are three methods as
follows:
（1）手调式风门（见图 11）
Page 119 of 188

Date: 2012-5-24
Rev.: V1.0
Manual damper (Figure 11)
图 11 手调式风门 Figure 11 Manual damper
凡单级控制的燃烧器(HSMB S 系列)均用手调式风门，先将风门上的固
定螺丝松开，根据喷油量的大小，调整风门的开度，使助燃空气量与喷油量相
匹配，再将固定螺丝拧紧。
The single stage type burner (HSMB S) is used manual damper (HSMB S).
First loosen the fixed screw on the damper, adjust the damper angle according to the
spraying quantity, it makes the combustion air match the spraying quantity, and then
tighten the fixed screw up.
（2）伺服电机调节式风门 Servo motor adjustment damper

双级控制燃烧器的风门为伺服电机调节式风门(图 12)，它是利用伺服电机
转动的角度来控制风门的开度。按图设置四个偏心轮的位置，根据第一级火焰
所需要空气来确定偏心轮(2)的位置；根据第一、第二级火焰燃烧所需的空气来
确定偏心轮(4)的位置。所有的调整环均可绕参考刻度旋转，用力按住红环，按
照你期望的方向旋转，可以改变任一偏心轮的位置。按下偏心轮轴离合销(5)，
可使电机从偏心轮轴上脱开。
The two-stage type burner is used servo motor adjustment type damper
(Figure 12). The damper angle is controlled by rotary angles of servo motor. The
position of the four eccentric wheels is shown as the figure. The position of
eccentric wheel (2) is confirmed according to the first stage needed air. The
position of eccentric wheel (4) is confirmed according to the first and second stages
needed air. All of the adjusting rings could spin around scale reference. Push the red
Page 120 of 188

Date: 2012-5-24
Rev.: V1.0
ring to spin as expected direction, could change any position of eccentric wheel.
Push eccentric wheel clutch pin (5) to break motor away from eccentric wheel.
1.二级火焰电磁阀运行偏心轮(必须设在第一级和第二级火焰偏心轮的中间位置)
Two stage flame solenoid valve operation
eccentric wheel (Must be set in the
middle of the first and second flame
eccentric wheels)
2. 一级火焰空气调节偏心轮
First flame air operation eccentric wheel
3. 燃烧器停止运行时，风门关闭时的偏
心轮
The eccentric wheel of closed damper
4．第二级火焰空气调节偏心轮
The second flame air operation eccentric
wheel
5．电机－偏心轮离合销，按下可使用脱
开偏心轮轴
Motor-eccentric wheel clutch pin, when
push it can break away from eccentric
wheel.
图 12 伺服电机控制式风门 Figure 12 Servo motor adjustment damper
4、齿轮油泵 Gear oil pump

BSA 油泵（Danfoss）BAS oil pump (Danfoss)
Page 121 of 188

Date: 2012-5-24
Rev.: V1.0
AE 油泵（SUNTEC）AE oil pump
1:Suction 2: Retum and internal by-pass plug 3:Nozzle outlet

4:Pressure gauge port 5:Vacuum 6:Pressure adjustment 7:Pressure
port
图 13 油泵外形示意图 Figure 13 Oil pump appearance drawing
5、光敏管、故障红灯及控制器 Flame sensor, alarm lamp and controller

（1）光敏管 flame sensor
光敏管是监察火焰的装置，在燃烧器运行的过程中,监测火焰的状态，当探
测到火焰不正常时，控制器将中断燃烧过程，并发出报警信号，同时在控制器
上亮起故障红灯。
注意，在环境光照比较强的情况下，光敏管可能感受到环境光线，认为是火焰
燃烧信号，使控制器发出错误信号，因此应绝对排除环境光线对光敏管的干扰。
Flame sensor is the device of the flame monitoring. When it detects the
abnormal flame, the controller will break off the combustion process and send
alarm signal, meanwhile the alarm lamp on the controller will flash. Attention, in
the strong environment lighting situation, the flame sensor might mistake the
environment lighting to the abnormal flame, so that the controller will send wrong
alarm signal. Consequently, must exclude the interference from the environment
lighting.
（2）故障红灯 Alarm lamp

当由于某种原因，使燃烧器不能正常启动或运行时，控制器将停止燃烧器
的一切操作，故障红灯亮，并输出警报信号。遇此情况，应仔细检查一切可能
导致故障的原因，并逐个排除，然后按下故障红灯，燃烧器将重新启动。
When any reason causes burner out of serve, the controller will stop all of the
operations, then the alarm lamp flash and send alarm signal. Should check all of the
faults carefully, after removed, push the alarm lamp, then restart burner.
用户根据需要，也可加装故障报警器，在燃烧器发生故障时报警。
As customer need could install the alarm buzzer.
Page 122 of 188

Date: 2012-5-24
Rev.: V1.0
红灯一经亮起，必须手动复位，一般须延时 3 分钟后，才能按得下红灯，
使燃烧器重新启动。
As soon as the alarm lamp flash, must reset it manually. General must delay 3
minutes, press alarm lamp to restart burner.
（3）控制器 Controller
控制器是控制燃烧器正常、安全工作的设备，它除了按预定的程序启动和
运行燃烧器外，还从安全的角度出发，设置了一系列的程序操作时间。HSMB
型燃烧器使用的控制器型号有：BHO64，LOA24，LAL2.25，各种控制器对程
序操作时间的规定如表 9 所示。
The controller makes burner operation normally and safety. Except start and
operate the burner as preset program, also set series of program operation time for
safety. HSMB burner’s controllers are: BH064, LOA24, LAL2.25. The operation
time per controller is shown as Table 9.
控制器特性表9
Controller character Table 9
程序操作时 Operation time
控制器型号第一级火焰与第二级火
后点火时间
Controller 安全时间预吹扫和驱气时间焰的时间
Afterignition
type Safety time Prepurge time Between No.1 and No.2
time
（S）（S） flame time
（S）
（S）
BHO64
10 13 3 15
LOA24
LOA44 5 25 ≈2 5～8
LAL2.25 2.5 22.5 2.5 15
注 Note
1)安全时间，是指在没有火焰的情况下，燃烧器允许燃料释放的最大允许时间，单位：秒 s。
Safety time: In non-flame situation, the maximum allowed fuel to releasing time, unit: s.
2)预吹扫和驱气时间：是指燃烧器起动到喷油开始的这一段时间，这段时间由风机吹扫燃烧
器、炉膛、烟道和烟囱、驱除其中的可燃气体，防止点火时爆炸；同时在这段时间内油泵抽吸燃
油，再通过回油管道送回油箱，驱逐其吸油管中的气体。
Pregurge time: The period of time of burner starting to spray starting, during this period fan
blows the combustible gas of burner, chamber, flue and chimney to prevent explosion at ignition.
Meanwhile the oil pump sprays fuel, then fuel is returned to oil thank by oil return pipe, to purge
the air from oil spray pipe.
3)后点火时间：从检测装置发出第一次火焰信号到点火装置关闭之间的时间。
Aftignition time: time of the first flame signal from detection unit to igniter closed.
4)第一级火焰与第二级火焰间的时间：是指在双级控制的燃烧器中，启动时第一级火焰点燃
和第二级火焰允许点燃之间的时间。
Between No.1 and No.2 flame time: for two stage control burner, the time between the first
Page 123 of 188

Date: 2012-5-24
Rev.: V1.0
starting flame and the second allowed flame.
以下以双级控制的燃烧器为例，说明控制器对启动和运行的程序控制。
Introduction of the program control of the controller to start and operation as
an example of two stage control burner
(a)闭合隔离开关和恒温器，启动燃烧器，电动机运转，带动风机吹扫燃烧器、
炉膛、烟道、烟囱等；同时带动油泵驱除吸油管道中的空气。
Close disconnecting switch and thermostat. Start burner. Control motor operation.
Start fan to blow burner, chamber, flue and chimney. Control oil pump to purge air
from oil spray pipe.
(b)稍后点火变压器开始工作，电极间放电产生电火花。
After a moment ignition transformer starts operation, to make electrical spark
between electrodes discharge.
(c)燃油总管和第一级火焰燃油管上的电磁阀打开，燃油流向第一级喷油嘴，其
压力达到油泵设定的压力，从喷油嘴中喷出、雾化。
Open the valve of oil pipe and the first flame oil pipe, make fuel oil flow to the
first oil nozzle. When the pressure achieves the setting pressure of oil pump, the
fuel is sprayed from oil nozzle and atomized.
(d)雾化后的燃油在燃烧头内与助燃空气混合，被电火花点燃。
The atomized fuel oil is mixed with combustible air in burner head, and then it
is burned by electrical spark.
(e)在第一级火焰点火期间，风门打开到适当位置(第一级火位置)，使进入燃烧
器的空气量与第一级喷油嘴喷出的燃油量所需的燃烧空气量相适应。
During the first stage burning, the damper is opened in position to adapt the air
quantity between burner and the first stage oil nozzle.
(f)如果火焰被正常点燃，在控制器设定的安全时间结束时，第二级火焰油管上
的电磁阀被打开，燃油在设定的油压下流到第二级喷油嘴，从喷油嘴中喷出、
雾化。与助燃空气混合后被点燃。与此同时，燃油进入油压缸，推动活塞，将
风门开大，使助燃空气增加，满足第一，第二级火焰同时燃烧所需的空气量(液
压缸调节式风门)；或者指令伺服电机转动，使风门也转到适合的开度(伺服电
机控制式风门)，此时燃烧器在满负荷下运行。它同时被光敏管和恒温器控制。
If the flame is ignited normally and finished in the set safety time, the valve of
the second flame oil pipe will be opened. Fuel oil flows to the second oil nozzle
under the set pressure, and then it is sprayed by oil nozzle. The atomized oil is
Page 124 of 188

Date: 2012-5-24
Rev.: V1.0
mixed with combustible air to be burned. Meanwhile fuel oil enters into oil cylinder
to push piston. And open damper wide to increase combustible air. That meets the
air quantity need when the first and the second flame burned together. Or makes
servo motor operate, and damper is turned to suited position. The burner operates
under full load. And it is controlled by photosensitive tube and thermostat.
(g)控制器切断点火变压器。
Controller switches off ignition transformer.
(h)当控制的温度和压力超过预先在恒温器或压力开关的设定的二级火力值，这
时恒温器或压力开关将断开，燃烧器将停止第二级火焰运行，同时关小风门(回
到第一级火位置)，当温度和压力又小于设定值时，这时恒温器或压力开关将
重新接通，第二级火焰投入运行。
When the temperature and pressure are over the set value of thermostat and
pressure switch, the temperature and pressure switch stopped working. The burner
will stop the second stage flame operate, and turn the damper down a little bit.
When the temperature and pressure are less than the set value, the thermostat and
pressure switch will be connected again, the second stage flame will be operated.
(i)如果在运行期间火焰熄灭，光敏管立刻发出信号，而控制器按照信号自动关
闭电磁阀、切断燃油。
If the flame is extinguished during operation, the photosensitive tube sent
signals to controller to close solenoid valve and shut off the fuel oil.
(j)重新起动燃烧器，重复上述动作，如火焰被再次点燃，燃烧器将恢复正常运
行，否则燃烧器停止工作，故障红灯亮。
Restart the burner and repeat the processes, if the flame is ignited, the burner
will resume working. Other wise the burner will stop working and alarm lamp will
be lighted.
(k)如果在预吹扫期间程序被打断(如电压不足，手控恒温器断开等)，则程序控
制器将回到它的原始位置，重复燃烧器的启动程序，如果故障原因不排除将停
止工作。
If the program is interrupted during prepure time (when undervoltage or the
manual thermostat is disconnected), the controller will reset, and then restarts the
burner. If the fault is not removed, the burner will stop working.
九、燃烧器的安装、启动和运行
Page 125 of 188

Date: 2012-5-24
Rev.: V1.0
Start-up, Running and Installation of the burner
1、安装 Installation
(1)安装前的准备
Prepare for installation
(a)检查烟囱(截面积和高度)是否符合炉体制造商的要求和当地的标准。
Check the chimney (sectional area and height) whether suit for the
requirement of the furnace manufacture and local standard.
(b)电源的电压和频率必须符合燃烧器的要求。
Frequency and the Voltage of the power must suit for the requirement of the
burner.
(c)燃油系统和尺寸必须符合本说明书的要求，油路系统闸门及其附件应当
严密，吸油管和回油管应做气密检查，在 1.5MPa 下不得泄漏。过滤器
应用 200 目⁄吋的滤网制作。
The fuel system and size must be suitable for the requirement of this
specification, the strobe of oil line system and attachment should be well
airproofed, oil suction pipeline and return oil line must have the pressurize
test and no leaking out at 1.5Mpa. The filter should use the 200mesh per inch
of the filter screen.
(d)检查燃烧器的随机附件是否齐备。
Check whether the spare parts of the burner are complete.
(f)根据炉膛的压力，燃烧器的运行曲线图 3、燃烧器油泵设定的压力和喷
油嘴的规格(表 6)，查表 6 中的有关数据，校核燃烧器的出力能否满足炉体供
热量的要求，若不能满足要求，应更换其它规格的喷油嘴，但应注意喷油量应
与燃烧器相匹配，不允许超过炉体要求的最大值或燃烧器允许的最大值，也不
能小于燃烧器出力的最小值，且雾化锥角也应与原来喷油嘴的相同，只有在某
些特殊情况下才能装不同雾化锥角的喷油嘴，否则会给运行带来一系列的问
题。
According to chamber pressure, Figure 3, Table 6 checks whether the power of
the burner satisfies the requirement of chamber heating. If the value can’t meet
requirement, oil nozzle should be replaced. Pay attention to the oil spray quantity
should match with the burner, it’s not allowed over the maximum of chamber
requirement or the burner allowable value. Also it should not be less than the
minimum of burner power. And the atomization cone angle should be the same as
the original. Only in particular situation, different nozzles were allowed to install,
otherwise it will affect operation.
(2)安装 Installation
Page 126 of 188

Date: 2012-5-24
Rev.: V1.0
(a)把安装法兰和石棉垫密封垫圈套在风管上，将石棉密封圈装在炉体安装
板上的孔和安装法兰之间，然后将螺栓拧紧。炉体板，密封垫圈、安装法兰之
间应密封，不允许漏气，防止在燃烧器运行期间高温烟气从这里漏出，烧坏燃
烧器，污染环境。将燃烧头按炉体的要求，伸入到燃烧室适当位置，再用安装
法兰上的螺栓将法兰固定在炉体上。
Set the installation flange and asbestos seal gasket up flue pipe. The asbestos
seal gasket is fixed between hole of the chamber installation plate and installation
flange, and then screw bolts up. It should be hermetic sealing among chamber plate,
seal gasket and installation flange, to protect high temperature gas leak from there
during burner operation. It will damage burner and pollute the environment.
(b)按油路系统图，用金属软管将油泵的吸油口与吸油管道相连，将回油口
与回油管道相连。并将压力表和真空压力表装在油泵相应的接口上。
Connect oil suction port of oil pump and oil suction pipe with metal hoses
according to oil system drawing.
(c)按线路图将电源线和有关的线路接好。
According to electrical drawings wire the power line and relevant lines well.
2、启动和运行 Start-up and Running

（1）启动前的准备 Ready for start-up
★检查燃油是否为燃烧器所要求的油种及指标，油中或油箱及管路中是否有水,
如上述条件不满足,极易造成油泵迅速损坏。
Check the fuel whether suitable for the oil standard of the burner required and
water in the oil or oil tank. If not would be damaged the oil pump seriously.
(a) 将燃烧器上的开关置于“O”（关），以防止燃烧器自动接通。
Park the switch at “O” of the burner to avoid turn-on with self-motion.
(b) 检查油泵和风机的旋转方向，若旋转方向相反，则将电源进线端的两
相对换（三相供电燃烧器）。
Check the circumgyrate directions of the oil pump and fan, if the circumgyrate
opposition, should trade the two powers in end. (Three-phase alternating current burner)
(c) 将吸油端的金属软管接入吸油管道上，打开吸油管道上的所有阀门及
其它切断油的装置。
Connect the return oil metal tube and the return oil pipe, open all valve of the
oil suction pipeline and shut off the oil with others device.
(d) 接通电源，强制给电机供电，此时油泵将从油箱中吸油，当看见燃油
从回油端金属软管流出时(尚未接在回油管道上)，最后断电。通常情况下，燃
Page 127 of 188

Date: 2012-5-24
Rev.: V1.0
烧器可自动完成排气。
Power turn on, supply the power to motor with force, then the oil pump will
suck oil from the oil tank. Power off when you can see the fuel out from the return
oil end of the metal tube (not connect with the return oil pipeline). The burner
usually can exhaust with self-motion.
注：如果管道过长，可能需要从排气孔排放空气。
Note: If the pipeline is too long, maybe drain the air from the air-bleed hole.
(e) 将回油金属软管接到回油管道上，此时燃烧器已为起动点火做好准备。
Connect the return oil metal tube and the return oil pipe, get ready for ignition
of the burner at this moment.
(f) 检查油箱中是否有油，锅炉中是否有水。
Check whether the oil tank contains oil and the boiler contains water.
(g) 检查线路是否正确。
Check whether the line is right.
(h) 检查锅炉及烟囱阀门是否打开，以使燃烧产物能自由排出。
Check whether the door of boiler and valve of chimney is opened in order to
discharge the burning production freely.
（2）启动和运行 Start-up and Running

(a) 断开第二级火焰恒温器防止第二级火焰点火。
Shut off the second flame thermostat to prevent the ignition of the second level
flame.
(b) 闭合隔离开关和控制器起动开关，燃烧器将按控制器设定的程序启动，
第一级火焰点燃。
Close the the isolating switch and control switch, the burner should start and
the flame of the first level is ignited according to the set program of the controller.
(c) 调节风门，使流入燃烧器的空气满足第一级火焰燃烧的空气量，固定
好其位置。
Adjust the throttle, inflow air of the burner meets the air dose of the first level
flame burning, and fixes the position.
(d) 停止燃烧器，再重新启动以核实点火是否稳定，若点火不稳定，可适
当调节风量及燃烧头位置。火焰理想的颜色应为明亮的桔黄色。
Shut off the burner, and restart to check whether the ignition is stable. if not ,
you can adjust the blowing rate and the position of the burner head. The ideal color
should be bright orange.
(e) 将第二级火焰恒温器闭合，闭合隔离开关和控制开关，燃烧器启动，
Page 128 of 188

Date: 2012-5-24
Rev.: V1.0
按预定程序运行，点燃第一级，第二级火焰，此时调节二次风门的开度，使其
满足第一级、第二级火焰同时工作时燃油的燃烧。
Stop the second level of the flame thermostat, close the isolating switch
and control switch, then the burner start according to the preset program, ignite the
flame of the first level and the second level, adjust the secondary damper opening at
this moment to meet amount of fuel when the flame of first level and the second
level burning.
(f) 通过调节旋流器在燃烧头内的位置，改变直流风和旋流风的配比，可
以获得最佳的燃烧状态。此时火焰呈明亮的桔黄色(烟气中的 CO2 含量在
10%—13%之间)。
Change the ratio of the DC wind and swirling wind by adjust cyclone position
in the combustion head, you can get the best combustion state and the flame
was bright orange (the flue gas CO2 content between 10% -13%).
(g) 当炉子的温度或压力超过第二级火焰恒温器或压力开关的设定值，这
时第二级火焰恒温器或压力开关断开，第二级火焰停止运行，只有第一级火焰
在运行，若此时温度或压力仍继续向上超过上限设定值，恒温器断开，燃烧器
停止运行。反之，若第二级火焰停止运行后，锅炉温度、压力低于二级设定值，
则第二级火焰又重新点燃。
When the temperature or pressure exceeds the setting
value, then the second level of the
flame thermostat or pressure switch is disconnected, only the first stage of the flame
in the run. If the temperature or pressure continues upward more than the upper
limit set valve, disconnect the thermostat, the burner stops running. Otherwise,
if the flame of the second stage to stop running, the boiler temperature and the
pressure are lower than the two settings, then the second level of the flame to
reignite.
(h) 在启动、运行的过程中，任何一个环节出故障后，都会导致燃烧器停
止工作，只有排除故障后才能重新启动。
Any link out of order in the running process will cause the burner stop working
and only to remedy of the trouble will restart.
（3）安全装置的校验 Check out the safety devices

在燃烧器启动后，应对安全装置进行校验，其方法如下：
After burner start-up, should check out safety devices, its methods are as
follows.
(a) 启动燃烧器
Burner start
(b)燃烧器正常运行时，将光敏管从其位置拨出，用一块干净的布盖住它，
Page 129 of 188

Date: 2012-5-24
Rev.: V1.0
模拟熄火，这时燃烧器应当停止工作或重新启动。
Draw out the photosensitive tube from its position and cover it with dry cloth
simulate flameout when the burner normal operation, then the burner should stop or
restart.
(c ) 继续遮住光敏管，此时燃烧器将重新启动，但这时光敏管并没有看见
光线，因此燃烧器将在控制器设定的时间内停止工作。仅能依靠手动，按下复
位开关才能重新启动燃烧器。
Cover the photosensitive tube and the burner will restart, but the photosensitive
tube don’t see the ray in this time, so the burner will stop working within time set in
the controller. Only press the reset switch with manual operation to restart the
burner.
这种试验必须至少做两次，才能证明是有效的。
This test must be done at least twice in order to prove effective.
(d) 为校验恒温器（控制开关）的可靠性，燃烧器运行过程中，调节设定
值，观察是否切换或停机。
Adjust the set valve and observe if necessary shut off or switchover in order to
check out reliability about the thermostat with the burner in the running process.
十、燃烧器的维护 Maintenance of the Burner

HSMB 型燃烧器不需要特别的维修，但要经常做好以下工作：
The HSMB type burners don’t need maintain especially, but always do the
following work better:
1. 切断电源，卸下光敏管，用清洁干布擦净。
Shut off power, unpack photosensitive tube and clean it with dry cloth.
2. 拆下喷油嘴，用汽油或煤油仔细清洗，正常运行 2000 小时左右，喷油嘴应
该换新。
Clean it with gasoline or kerosene after you unpack the oil nozzle and replace
the oil nozzle which working about 2,000 hours.
3. 清除旋流器上及燃烧头锥体内壁的烟灰、积碳保养。
Clean the carbon deposit in the cyclone and cone wall of combustion head.
4. 清洁电极，刮除灰尘和积碳，校正两电极的位置及其间的距离。
Clean the carbon deposit and dust in the electrode, proofread the distance and
position between two electrodes.
5. 仔细清洗油泵内的滤油网。
Clean the oil-filter screen of the oil pump carefully.
6. 清洗过滤器和油箱，如发现滤网破损需及时更换。如果油箱沉积物较多，
应予以清洗。
Page 130 of 188

Date: 2012-5-24
Rev.: V1.0
If the filter screen was damaged when you clean filter or oil tank, then replace
it .If more deposit in oil tank, should clean it.
7. 若必要时，要清洁炉体及烟囱的烟道。
Clean the furnace body and the flue of chimney if necessary.
注意：燃烧器的外壳不能用有机溶剂(如酒精、丙酮、香蕉水等)清洗，而
只能用布擦洗。应经常注意油箱中的油位，不允许降低到规定的位置，以免损
坏油泵。
Note: The shell of the burner can not use organic solvents to clean (such
as alcohol, acetone, banana oil etc), but only with cloth .Should always pay attention to the
oil level in the tank, not allowed be reduced to the required position ,in order to avoid to
damage the oil pump.
十一、燃烧器常见故障及其排除方法 The Troubles and Eliminate way of Burner

故障类型可能的原因排除方法
Type of Troubles The Causation Eliminate way
1.光敏管损坏或被油烟堵塞 1.更换或清洗
The photosensitive tube is Replacing or Cleaning
damaged or blocked by lampblack.
2.风量不足 2.检查锅炉和烟囱的烟道，并清扫
在有火焰燃烧的情况下停
Lack of blowing rate Check and cleaning the flue of
车(故障红灯亮，包括喷火
chimney and boiler
后又熄灭)
Shut down in the flames 3.光敏管回路损坏 3.检修
burned case (Red light is The return line of photosensitive Examine and repair
on, include quench after tube is damaged
jetted out flame.
4.旋流器和燃烧头有脏污 4.清除
Cyclone and Combustion Head Clean out
have dirt
1．燃烧空气量太大 1．调节风门，减少空气量
Combustion air too high Adjust damper, reduce the flow of
air
喷油点火但形不成火焰或
2．油泵压力不够，雾化不良 2．调油压为要求值
有火星 The pressure of Oil pump and Adjust oil pressure to the valve of
Oil spray and ignite with Atomization not enough require
spark , but don’t form a
flame
3．油含有水份 3．更换燃油，去除水份
Oil contain water Replace fuel , wipe off water
4．喷油嘴磨损，雾化角不对 4．换喷油嘴
Page 131 of 188

Date: 2012-5-24
Rev.: V1.0
Oil nozzle is abraded and Replace Oil nozzle

atomization angle is wrong
油泵抽真空度大于-40KPa，易产
生噪声
The vacuum degree of oil pump
over -40Kpa, make noise easy
1.油管直径太小 1.根据说明书更换油管
The diameter of oil pipe is too Replace oil pipe according to
small instruction book
2.油箱与燃烧器的距离过长，或 2.缩短吸油管的长度，尽量减少接
附加的局部阻力(弯头、节流等) 头、弯管等
过大 Shorten the oil suction pipe, as far as
油泵有噪声 The distance between oil tank and possible reduce Tie-in, siphon etc
Noise of the Oil pump Burner is too long, or accessional
part of resistance is too much
(Elbow, throttle etc)
3.油管中有空气
3.排除空气
Air in the oil pipe
Eliminate air
4.过滤器肮脏
4.清洗
The filter is dirtiness
Cleaning
5.软管损坏
5.更换
The hose is damaged
Replacing
1．燃烧空气量不足 1.加大风门，增加燃烧空气量
Combustion air is lower Increased damper to increase the
combustion air
2．喷油嘴失效(磨损或堵塞) 2.清洗或更换
Oil nozzle is abrade or blocked Cleaning or Replacing
火焰形状不好，有烟和碳
黑 3．燃烧室设计不合理或太小 3.减少喷油量，以适合燃烧室的能
The form of flame is not The design of combustion 力
well with smoke and carbon chamber is irrational or small Reduce the oil spray quantity to
black
match the capacity of the
combustion chamber
4．相对于燃烧室的尺寸，喷油嘴 4.更换喷油嘴，增加其出力，同时
的喷油量不足加大风门供风量
The oil spray quantity of oil nozzle Replace the oil nozzle to increase
Page 132 of 188

Date: 2012-5-24
Rev.: V1.0
is not enough relative to the output and increase the feed blowing
combustion chamber size rate of damper
5．锅炉或烟囱管道堵塞 5.清除积灰
The boiler and the flue of chimney Clean the dust stratification
is blocked
6．雾化压力过低 6.调高油压或清洗、更换油泵
The pressure of atomizationis Adjust the pressure of oil higher or
too low cleaning, replace the oil pump
1．通风抽力过大(当烟道上有引 1．调节引风度
风机时) Adjust the blowing rate
Ventilation pumping excessive
force when the induced draft fan
on the flue
2．喷油嘴失效雾化不良(磨损或 2．清洗或更换喷油嘴
堵塞) Clean or replace Oil nozzle
Oil nozzle malfunction and
atomization not well(abraded or
blocked)
火焰不良，脉动或脱火 3．燃油中有水 3．排水(不得用燃烧器的油泵)

Flame is not well , Oil contains water Drain(Don’t use oil pump of the
fluctuations or flame-lifting burner )
4．旋流器有污垢 4．清洗
Cyclone have dirt Cleaning
5．燃烧空气量过大 5．减少燃烧空气量
Combustion air quantity is too Reduce combustion air quantity
high
6．旋流器与燃烧头间的通道过大 6．调节燃烧头的位置，减少通道
The distance between Cyclone and 面积
combustion head is too long Adjust the position of the burner
head to reduce the area of channels
1.炉体运行温度太低(露点以下) 1．加大负荷，提高运行温度
The running temperature of The increased load, increase the
furnace too low (down dew point) operating temperature
炉体内部腐蚀
Eroding about inner furnace 2.燃油的含硫量过高 2．改变燃油品种
body Fuel sulfur content is too high Change fuel oil type
3.烟温度过低 3．调换喷油嘴，增加出力
The flue gas temperature is too low Swapper oil nozzle to increase
Page 133 of 188

Date: 2012-5-24
Rev.: V1.0
output
烟囱出口有碳黑
燃烧不充分调节供风量
Chimney exports have
Combustion is insufficient Adjust feed blowing rate
carbon black
Page 134 of 188

风机使用说明书
船用风机使用说明书
Fan Instruction Manual
1-9
Page 135 of 188

目录
Contents
1. 风机起动和运行通用规程 Regulations of start & operation............... 3

1.1. 起动前检查　 Inspection before start............................................................. 3
1.1.1. 所有螺栓是否已经按规定旋紧：....................................................... 3
All of the bolts should be tightened according to the regulation. ..................... 3
1.1.2. 轴承润滑情况检查：Inspection of bearing lubrication oil ................. 3
1.1.3. 轴中心线对中检查：Inspection of shaft centerline ............................ 3
1.1.4. 叶轮转动灵活性：Flexibility of impeller turn .................................... 3
1.1.5. 连接件：Connector .............................................................................. 3
1.1.6. 检查防护罩：Protection cover inspection ........................................... 4
1.1.7. 外来杂物是否存在：Foreign materials............................................... 4
1.1.8. 起动前运行场地的防护：Protect operation sites before start ............ 4
1.2. 起动运行期间的检查：Inspection during the period of operation................ 4
2. 常见的故障 Common failures .............................................................. 5
3. 清洗和平衡 Cleaning and balance........................................................ 8
4. 维护和保养 Maintenance ...................................................................... 8
2-9
Page 136 of 188

1. 风机起动和运行通用规程 General regulations of start & operation
1.1. 起动前检查　 Inspection before start
1.1.1. 所有螺栓是否已经按规定旋紧：
All of the bolts should be tightened according to the regulation.
全部地脚螺栓 All of the foundation bolts
轴承座固定在底盘上的螺栓 Bolts of fixing bearing pedestal and chassis
轴承与轴承座的螺栓 The bolts of connection bearing with bearing pedestal
电动机与底盘的固定螺栓 The bolts of fixing motor and chassis
轴承盖与轴承箱的固定螺栓 The bolts of fixing bearing cover and bearing box
轮毂与转轴部件的固定螺栓 The bolts of fixing hub and shaft
进风罩与蜗壳的固定螺栓 The bolts of fixing inlet air enclosure
蜗壳与底盘的固定螺栓 The bolts of fixing volute and chassis
进气室与蜗壳的固定螺栓 The bolts of fixing inlet chamber and volute
其他螺栓 others
1.1.2. 轴承润滑情况检查：Inspection of bearing lubrication oil
检查轴承的润滑油的量、质量和分布情况
Inspect the bearing for lubricating oil quantity, quality and distribution.
1.1.3. 轴中心线对中检查：Inspection of shaft centerline
径向偏心 Radial offset

轴向偏移 Axial deviation
1.1.4. 叶轮转动灵活性：Flexibility of impeller turn
检查叶轮进口处与进风罩之间的间隙
Inspect interstice of the impeller entrance and the inlet enclosure.
用手盘动叶轮与驱动原动机的整体，检查运转情况
Turn the whole of impeller and drive mover with hands to inspect operation.
1.1.5. 连接件：Connector
风机的连接法兰平整性密封性
The smoothness and tightness of fan connection flange
确认电机皮带的张紧程度
3-9
Page 137 of 188

Confirm the tensioning of motor belt
1.1.6. 检查防护罩：Protection cover inspection
电机皮带轮的防护罩
Protection cover of motor belt
其它运转部件的防护罩
Other parts protection cover
进出口的防护格栅
Protection grille of inlet and outlet
1.1.7. 外来杂物是否存在：Foreign materials
对风机作内部检查
Inner parts inspection of fan
对风管作内部检查
Inner parts inspection of flue pipe
1.1.8. 起动前运行场地的防护：Protect operation sites before start
检查电气线路是否合格
Inspect electrical circuit
确认电机的转向
Inspect motor rotate direction
委任起动运行的现场指挥
Appoint the director of starting operation
1.2. 起动运行期间的检查：Inspection during the period of operation
是否有异常的声音
If there is abnormal voice
是否有异常的振动
If there is abnormal vibration
轴承等处是否有异常升温
If there is abnormal temperature-rise on bearing
4-9
Page 138 of 188

2. 常见的故障 Common failures
故障现象原因排除方法
Failure phenomenon Reason Obviate method
轴承温度过高 A．轴承内润滑剂过多 A．恢复合适的润滑剂量
Excess temperature There is too much lubrication Make lubricant in proper dosage.
bearing agent in bearing.
B．拆下轴承，彻底清洗，再加合适的润滑
B．润滑剂质量不对剂
The lubricant quality is wrong. Remove bearing to cleaning, add suitable
C．轴承内缺少润滑剂 lubricant.
Bearing inside is lack of lubricant. C．恢复合适的润滑剂量
D．轴承内径向间隙过大 Make lubricant in proper dosage
Bearing inside radial interstice is D．重新调整径向间隙

too large. Adjust radial interstice
E．驱动皮带过松（打滑） E．按规定张紧驱动皮带
Drive mover belt is too loose. Tension drive mover belt according to
F．排气温度过高 regulation
Exhaust temperature is too high. F．检查运行条件，恢复排气正常温度
G．环境温度过高 Inspect operation condition, make exhaust

temperature normal
Ambient temperature is too high.
G．缩短加润滑剂的时间间隔
Shorten interval time of adding lubricant.
轴承处噪声不正 A. 润滑剂不足或不适当 A．检查润滑器具的工作情况，恢复正常的
常: Lack of lubricant or 润滑剂量
The noise of bearing unsuitability Check operation condition of lubricant
is abnormal: B. 轴承磨损 fitting, renew to normal lubrication dose
A. 尖叫声 Bearing wear B．更换轴承
Screaming C. 在轴承箱内有外来杂物 Replace the bearing
B. 敲击声或隆隆 There are foreign materials in C．去除杂物，清洗和检查轴承，如有必
响（在轴承箱 bearing box. 要，更换轴承和润滑剂
内） Remove foreign materials, clean and
D. 轴承在安装时有损伤，滚动
Knock or rumble 元件有印痕、凹槽或磨损 inspect bearing. Replace the bearing and
in bearing box lubricate oil if necessary.
During installation bearing is
worn.. Rotating components D．更换轴承
have imprint, flute or wear. Replace the bearing.
风机振动 A．叶片上积灰 A. 彻底清洗叶轮
Fan vibrration The blade gathers dust Clean the impeller.
B．叶轮有不正常的侵蚀或腐 B. 叶轮重作平衡或更换
蚀 Re-balance the impeller or replace it.
Impeller has abnormal C. 消除过热原因—更换转子
erosion and corrosion.
5-9
Page 139 of 188

C．过热引起叶轮或轴挠曲． Eliminate overheating reason, to replace
the rotor.
The impeller or axle bended
cause by over heating D. 再平衡叶轮
D．叶轮平衡不良 Re-balance the impeller.
The impeller has poor E. 恢复中心线的线对中不齐
balance. Recover the position of centre line.
E．联轴器或皮带驱动中心线 F. 适当张紧皮带并检查中心线的对中
对中不齐
Tension belt suitably and check the
Centre line of the coupling centering line.
or belt is centering
irregularity. G. 检查驱动机器的平衡情况及工作不
正常作条件—修理或如有必要，更换
F．驱动皮带张紧不正确
Check motor’s balance and conditions of
Belt’s tension is wrong. abnormal operation. Repair it or replace if
G．驱动机器平衡不良或工作 necessary.
不正常 H. 重新配置地脚垫片置或与底盘固定不正
Motor’s balance is poor or 确或重新固定
operation abnormal. Replace anchor gasket.
H．电动机-风机地脚垫片配置 I. 适当拧紧部件螺栓
或与底盘固定不正确
Tight the bolts suitably.
Anchor gaskets of motor
and fan configuration or J. 用选择正确的减振垫来代替不生共振
chassis fixed Replace cushion blocking with right one,
I．轴承部件螺栓松 to avoid resonance.
The bearing bolt becomes K. 检查电动机转速或皮带的传动比，可作
less crowded. 必要的修正
J．减振垫安装不正确（产生 Check the motor speed or belt
共振） transmission ratio, to be corrected.
The installation position of L. 调整气体流量的设定值直至振动降到可
cushion blocking is not 接受的水平
right. (to produce resonance Adjust the set value of gas flow to reduce
phenomenon) vibration to an acceptable level.
K．转速过高
The rotate speed is higher.
L．气流喘振
Airflow surge
风机有不正常噪声 A．风机内有外来杂物 A．检查并清洁风机
Abnormal noise There are foreign materials Check and clean the fan.
inside fan.
B．检查叶轮与进风罩之间的间隙和轴与密
B．内部有摩擦封件之间的间隙—用手盘动风机
Internal friction. Check the gap between impeller and air
6-9
Page 140 of 188

inlet cover, the gap between axle and
C．外部有摩擦
sealing element, turn the fan by hand.
External friction
C．检查防护罩的部位和固定情况—用手盘
动风机
Check the position of protective cover and
fixed situation.
轴承过早磨损 A. 振动过分剧烈 A．检查，根据不同原因产生的振动加以纠正
The bearing was Too intense vibration Check and correct vibration cause by
prematurely B. 润滑不恰当 B．检查和纠正润滑情况
worn. Inappropriate lubrication Check and correct lubrication.
C. 当风机停下时，风机受到 C．把风机与其他机器隔振
外部振动所冲激 Isolate the fan and others machines to avoid
When the fan stopped, it was vibration.
affected by external D．针对环境和工作条件的要求采取预防措施
vibration.
（如不用风机时，定期运转、保养或再加热）
D. 当风机不使用时，未作防腐
According to various environments and
蚀保养处理 requirements of operating condition take
The fan is not been deal with preventive actions. (For example, when the
anti-corrosion, when it is fan is unused, it should be periodic
unused. operated, maintained or reheated.)
起动失败或起动时 A．转子卡住 A．用手盘动风机以检查和调查卡住原因
间过长 The rotor is locked. （摩擦、有障碍物等）
Failure-to-start or B．在电动机的接线处电压过 Check up the locked cause by rotated the
staring time too fan.
低
long
B．检查电源线电压—如损耗过大，加大电
The voltage of motor wiring
is too low. 源线
C．电动机拖不动 Check voltage of power line. If the

consumption is excessive, should increase
The motor is overload. the power line.
D．电动机额定功率过低 C．检查安全机构的设定值
Rated power is too low. Check setting value of safety gear.
E．起动程序不正确 D．更换电动机
Starting procedure is Replace motor.
incorrect.
E．调整起动设备
F．当起动时功率消耗过大
Adjust starting equipment.
The starting power
consumption is excessive. F．核实当起动时气体流量控制机构是否处
在关闭位置
When starting the fan, gas flow control
mechanism should be closed.
性能达不到要求 A．转速过高 A．检查电动机转速或皮带传动比，可作
7-9
Page 141 of 188

The performance Rotational speed is 必要的纠正
can not meet excessive. Check rotational speed or transmission
requirements. ratio of belt, can make necessary
B．在风管内的压力降低于要
corrective.
求值
B．设定流量控制机构以达到设气体流量
The pressure drop inside the
air pipe is under the required Adjust flow control mechanism to reach the
value. setting flow value.
C．转速过低 C．检查电动机转速或皮带传动比，可作必要
Low rotation speed. 的纠正，按要求张紧皮带
D．在风机进口和出口处的风 Check rotational speed or transmission

ratio of belt, can make the necessary
管设计不良
corrective, tension belt as required.
Design of air pipe between
D．改正风管的设计和尺寸配置
fan inlet and outlet is badly.
Correct air pipe design and dimension
E．旋转方向错误
setting.
Wrong rotation direction.
E．把电动机的旋转方向反过来
F．叶轮和进风罩之间的间隙
Reverse the motor rotation direction
过大
F．调整间隙
The gap between the impeller
and the air inlet cover is Adjust gap.
excessive.
3. 清洗和平衡 Cleaning and balance
在一些装置内可能产生积灰，这些会致使风机叶轮由于侵蚀或腐蚀而产生不平
衡，从而逐渐损伤轴承。在这样条件下，最好定期检查风机的振动情况，以确定风
机情况的改变。如有必要，应清洗风机并重新作平衡。大量积灰也有可能降低风机
的性能
Some devices may gather dust, which result in the impeller unbalance due to
corrosion and erosion. Thus gradually damage bearing. In such conditions, the vibration
of the fan should be checked regularly, to confirm change of the fan. When it is
necessary, the fan should be cleaned and rebalanced. A lot of dust may reduce the
performance of the fan.
4. 维护和保养 Maintenance
风机在运行1500 小时后，应及时补充轴承座内润滑油脂，油脂的加入量以轴
承座溢流孔溢出为准。以后每三个月定期补给适量油脂。
8-9
Page 142 of 188

Lubricating oil should be timely added into the bearing seat after the fan operation
in 1500 hours. The lubricating oil should be full to spill from the overflow orifice of the
bearing seat. Adequate lubricating oil should be regular supplied every three months.
9-9
Page 143 of 188

Date: 2013-2-25
Rev.: V1.0
风机安装技术条件
Technical requirements for fan installation

1.整体安装的风机，搬运和吊装时的绳索，不得捆缚在转子和机壳或轴承盖的吊环上。
During installation of the fan, the rope used to transport and lift should not be tied to the rotor and the
casing or bearing cover rings
2.各管路与风机连接时法兰面应对中贴平，不应硬拉和别劲，风机机壳不应承受其他机件的重量，
防止机壳变形。管路安装完毕后，应复测机组的不同轴度是否符合要求。
When connect the line and the fan, the flange surface should be centered and coordinated, and should
not be hard drawn; the fan casing should not bear the weight of other parts, to prevent the casing
deformation. After pipe installation, the unit alignment should be retest to comply with the requirements.
3.风机连接的管路需要切割或焊接时，不应使机壳发生变形，一般宜在管路与机壳脱开后进行。
The connection pipe should be cutting or welding after separate the pipe and the fan casing, and should
not make the casing deformation occur.
4.参考标准 GB/T12522-1996 膨胀节设计手册，请保证膨胀节工作时，轴向总位移ΔX≤35，径向总

位移Δy≤15，保证管路相隔 5m 处都安装有膨胀节。
Refer to the manual GB/T12522-1996 Expansion Joint Design, please make sure that expansion joint
on the job,the axial displacement ΔX≤35, radial total displacementΔy≤15, ensure line 5m apart are
installing expansion joint。
5.金属波纹管膨胀节不能承重，应单独吊装。
Metal bellows expansion joints can not load-bearing, should separate lifting.
6.对带内筒的金属波纹管膨胀节应注意内衬筒的方向与介质流动方向一致。
For metal bellows expansion joint with inner cylinder, the direction of inner liner should be consistent
with the flow direction of medium
7.除设计要求预变形量外，严禁用使金属波纹管膨胀节变形的方法来调整管道的安装偏差，以免影
响到其正常的功能。
Except the design requirements for the amount of pre-deformation, non deformation of the metal
bellows expansion joints should be use to adjust the deviation of the pipeline installation, so as not to
affect its normal function.
8.安装过程不允许焊渣飞溅到金属波纹管膨胀节的表面和使其受到其他机械损伤。
Page 144 of 188

Date: 2013-2-25
Rev.: V1.0
The installation process does not allow welding slag splashing to the surface of the metal bellows
expansion joints and subject it to other mechanical damage.
9.法兰连接安装的金属波纹管膨胀节，不允许为了对准螺栓孔而强行利用外力扭动膨胀节的另一端。
For metal bellows expansion joints with flange connection , forced twisting the other end of the
expansion joint to align the bolt holes are not allowed.
10.辅助工具在膨胀节安装结束后必须立即拆除。
Auxiliary tool must be dismantled immediately after the the expansion joint installation.
11.由于输送介质为高温烟气，所以在安装膨胀节时，法兰之间的间隙请预留ΔX/2，为了减少对膨
胀节以及烟气管路的损伤。
Due to the transmission medium for high temperature flue gas, therefore, when installing expansion
joint, please allow ΔX/2 between flange, in order to reduce the damage of expansion joint and the flue
gas pipeline.
Page 145 of 188

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION
操作维护手册
HANSUN
Centrifugal Macerating Pump
离心式粉碎泵
Version: 1.1
1st January 2010
Hansun (Shanghai) Marine Technology Co., Ltd

Building 60, No.1000 Zhangheng Rd, Zhangjiang
High-tech Park, Pudong Shanghai 201203, China
Tel: +86 21 50793367; Fax: +86 21 50793370
Mail: info@hansun-marine.com
www.hansun-marine.com
Page 146 of 188

Table of contents目录:
1. General 总则
1.1 General description 总则描述
1.2 Delivery交货
1.3 Quality warrantee质量保证
2. Technical specification 技术规格书

2.1 Name plate 铭牌
2.2 Explanation of the type number 型号描述
3. Installation 安装
3.1 Mounting 安装须知
3.2 Wiring 接线须知
4. Transport/ storage 运输储存
5. Dismantling 拆卸
5.1 Access to impeller 叶轮拆卸
5.2 Dismantling shaft mechanical seal 泵轴密封拆卸
5.3 Dismantling seat bracket 机架拆卸
5.4 Inspection 检查
6. Assembling 安装
6.1 Fitting bearing 轴承安装
6.2 Fitting Secure ring 固定环安装
6.3 Fitting mechanical seal/ impeller 机械轴封、叶轮安装
7. Anti-frost防冻保护
8. Start-up/ stop启动、停止
8.1 Start-up启动
8.2 Stop停止
9. Trouble shooting 故障解除
10. Inspection and maintenance 检查和维护

10.1 Drain the pump水泵泻放
10.2 Bearing maintenance 轴承维护
11. Drawing with part list 图纸及零件清单
Page 147 of 188

1. General 总则
Well thank you for preferring Macerating pump from Hansun, for your kind
understanding and operation, please read this manual carefully at first beginning. That is
more important to customer for right installation and keeping pump operation in good
order.
谢谢你使用汉盛的离心泵，为了能更好的理解和操作，请首先仔细阅读该手册，这
对能更好的安装和使用水泵非常重要。
The copyright of this manual for Hansun, we reverse the right for design optimizing and
manual updating without prior notification.
汉盛拥有该手册的版权，同时我们保留更新该手册的权利。
1.1 General description总则描述

This operation and maintenance manual apply to Hansun centrifugal macerating
pump, PWF Series Marine pulverizing pump is the open impeller centrifugal
discharge pump, which is used to pulverize and transfer the soft foul in the sewage
under 85 ℃. The diameter of the maximum solid particles is not more than 5mm
after circular crushing. It is also applicable to pulverizing the coagulated heavy fuel
oil under low temperature, in order to facilitate injection.
此操作维护手册适用于汉盛的离心粉碎泵, PWF系列船用粉碎泵系开式叶轮离
心排放泵，用于温度低于85摄氏度的生活污水中软质污物粉碎及输送。经循环
粉碎后的最大固体颗粒下径不大于5mm,也适用于船用重油低温凝固粉碎，便于
喷射。
1.2 Delivery 交货
The pump delivered with wood skid mount, and well fastening. Please check
packing when you open, if any damage please inform carrier immediately.
该泵交货是为木箱包装并绑扎完好，请在开箱时检查一下是否有破损，如果存
在损坏，请立即通知货运公司。
1.3 Quantity warrantee 质量保证

We secure warrantee period at 12 months after delivery, also please kindly be
careful for replacing with original parts upon any repairs.
我们确保交货12个月的质量保证期，同时确保使用原厂的零部件。
2. Technical specification 技术规格书

For your understanding, we hereby list with technical specification as follow:
为了便于用户理解，我们在此罗列了该泵的规格书如下：
PUMP泵 MOTOR马达
Capacity排量: 20 m3/h Model型号: Y90L-2-H
Head压头: 0.11Mpa Power功率: 2.2kw
Seal type轴封型式: Mechanical Voltage电制: 3x380/440VAC,
50/60Hz, 3P
Impeller叶轮: Stainless steel Speed转速: 2840/ 3470RPM
Shaft轴: Stainless steel Isolation绝缘等级: F
Pump casing泵壳: Cast iron Protection保护等级: IP54
Media介质: Sewage & sludge Connection接法： Delta
Page 148 of 188

2.1 Name plate 铭牌
The pump delivery with name plate description as follow:
水泵交货时已经带有铭牌，具体如下：
2.2 Main technical parameter

Motor
Q W.Head Inlet Dia. Outlet Dia
Type power
m3/h Mpa (mm) (mm)
KW
2PWF-11B 20 0.11 2.2 65 40
2.3 Technical description技术规格描述

The capacity of the pump appears from the name plate on the pump. And motor
mounted on pump rack, which gives connection with pump casing and foundation.
Motor shaft integrated with impeller shaft, which aligned before delivery.
The pump casing made in cast iron, and impeller made in Stainless steel, pump shaft
in stainless steel also.
铭牌上有水泵对应的排量描述。马达装在联接架上，其用于马达和水泵的联接，
马达轴为一体是，直接连接叶轮，交货前已经在工厂校正。泵壳为铸铁和叶轮
为铸钢，叶轮轴为不锈钢。
3. Installation 安装
The pump installation is much more important to keep system working in good condition.
The pump should be mounted and fastened on a robust foundation, and keep away form
vibration and wet, and secure suction head positive since subject centrifugal pump
working without self-priming. Meanwhile please be sure tightness of piping upon pump
installed, and keep no leakage.
水泵安装的好坏是直接影响能否正常工作的关键，水泵应该安装在一个坚实牢靠的
底座上，应该远离震动、水气等，该泵没有自吸能了，故吸口需要保证正压。同时
安装完毕后保证管路的密性，避免渗漏。
3.1 Mounting 安装须知
If the pump intended for pumping hot or cold liquids, the operator must be aware
that it is dangerous to touch the pump surface, consequently, must take the
necessary safety measures.
如果水泵用于输送热和非常冷的液体，操作者应注意不要触碰水泵表面，
以免受伤，同时，需要对水泵采取一些安全措施。
3.2 Wiring接线须知
Wiring to be carried out by authorized skilled workmen

水泵的接线需要有经验并被授权的操作者完成
4. Transport/ storage 运输/储存

The pump is mounted in wood case for transportation, and to be stored in dry area.
The pump is to be lifted in the following way.
水泵出厂时为木箱包装，便于运输，同时请放置在干燥处存放。
5. Dismantling 拆卸
The pump dismantling is to be followed with guidance, and avoid any defectives and
Page 149 of 188

injuries caused. Before dismantling, make sure that it has stopped. Empty the pump of
liquid before it is dismantled from the piping system. If the pump has been pumping
dangerous liquids you are to be aware of this and take the necessary safety measures. If
the pump has been pumping hot liquids, take great care that it is drained before it is
removed from the piping system. Consequently, take the necessary safety measures.
请按照如下指导拆卸水泵，以避免不必要的损坏和受伤。在拆卸前，请确保水泵已
经完全停止。在水泵从管路上拆下前放空水泵内残水。如果曾经输送过危险液体，
请采取必要的安全措施。如果水泵输送过加热液体，请在泻放管路和水泵时需要非
常小心，避免受伤，并采取必要的安全措施。
5.1 Access to impeller 叶轮拆卸

Unscrew bolts of pump case and mounting bracket, then lift motor together with
pump shaft and impeller, unscrew fasten nuts of impeller and take off impeller by
wood hummer.
松开泵壳和安装架之间的螺栓，将马达和泵轴、叶轮一起吊起来，松开叶轮的
锁紧螺帽，并用木榔头均匀敲击叶轮脱卸。
5.2 Dismantling of shaft seal 泵轴密封拆卸

Dismantle impeller as above, and reach mechanical seal.
依据上面的方法拆下叶轮，然后可以脱卸机械轴封
5.3 Dismantling of seat bracket 机架拆卸

Dismantle impeller as above, and unscrew coupling bolts and take off seat bracket
依据上面的方法拆下叶轮，然后松开联节轴螺栓，然后可以取下联接几架。
5.4 Inspection 检查
When the pump has been dismantled, check the following parts for wear and
damages.
当水泵拆卸解体后，请检查一下相应部件
Secure ring/impeller: Max. clearance 0.4~1mm measured
固定环/叶轮：最大0.4~1mm间隙
Mechanical seal: check seat fitness
机械轴封：检查接触面，是否有破损
Bearing: Check any wear and noise when you turn bearing.
轴承：转动轴承时是否有磨损和噪音
6. Assembling 安装
The pump assembling is to be in right sequence, otherwise will cause serious damages.
水泵需要按照正确的顺序安装，否则可能会造成严重损坏。
6.1 Fitting bearing

轴承安装
Place the support disc in the bearing cover and press the bearing into place in the
bearing cover, and hit bear by copper or wood hummer in right fitness.
将轴承支撑盘压入轴承盖，用铜或木榔头轻击配合。
6.2 Fitting Secure ring

固定环安装
Tighten the bearing cover to the shaft seal cover. Lead the Fixed ring cover the shaft
Page 150 of 188

unit it touches the shaft seal cover and then further 1~1.5mm into the shaft seal
cover.
旋紧轴承盖，让固定环碰到轴承密封盖，露出1~1.5mm即可
6.3 Fitting mechanical seal/ impeller

机械轴封/叶轮安装
Fit the mechanical seal in right direction first, then fit sunk key in the shaft and lead
the impeller towards the shoulder of the shaft. Take care that the ring at the end of
the shaft seal spring locates in the recess of the impeller. Secure the impeller with a
washer and a nut.
首先将机械轴封根据正确方向安装上，然后在轴上安装叶轮键，并将叶轮套上
轴，直至轴定位处，注意轴封后段的弹簧环和叶轮的接触面，并在轴端用锁紧
垫圈和螺母旋紧叶轮，并锁紧。
7. Anti-Frost
防冻保护
The pumps, which are not in operation during frost period, and to be drained for avoiding
frost damage. Remove the plug at the bottom of pump to empty the pump. Alternatively,
it is possible to use anti-frost liquids in normal constructions.
泵不能在冰冻期内使用，为了避免被冻坏，请在气温过低时泻放泵体内的残水。请
将泵底部的闷头旋开，将水泵内的残水泻放完。此外，可以在腔体内注入防冻液。
8. Start-up/ stop
启动/停止
Checking power connection of motor is correct, then turns on the pump formoment time
and check rotation of pump, it should follow up with arrow mark.
检查马达的电源连接是否正确，然后电动马达，检查马达转向是否正确，并和箭
头标记是否一致。
8.1 Preparation and maintenance for operation prior to starting:

启动前的准备和运转维护
（1）It should fill up with water before the first starting, and if the pump has operated for
sometimes, filling with water isn’t required, but it should to be opened with suction and
discharge valve.
首次启动前应先向泵内灌满水。如已工作过则不必灌水，此时应打开泵吸入阀
和压出阀。
（2）The pump can’t bear weight of the pipeline.

水泵不能作为管路支承，以防水泵变形。
（3）When the pump is in operation, check if the reading for all instruments are abnormal,
the pointer of instruments should be no strong jumping.
水泵运转时，应检查各仪表读数是否正常，表针应无剧烈跳动。
（4）When the operation is for a longer time, tightness must be checked all the times for
the connection for on suction pipe, cocks and others as to avoid the air leakage,
otherwise the pump condition would be failed.
长期工作时应经常检查吸入管路上的接头，旋螺塞等的紧密性，以防空气吸入，
破坏泵的正常工作。
Page 151 of 188

（5）Look for heating up motor and the condition of mechanical packing leakage.
经常注意电机及轴承温升以及机械密封的泄漏情况，如发现异常应查处原因及
时排除。
8.2 Stopping down the pump

泵的停车
（1）Close discharge valve and vacuum gauge then stop motor.
慢慢关闭出口阀，真空表，关闭电动机。
（2）When it is not in use for long time, pump should be dismantled for checking
cleaning and oiling. Then keep it carefully.
长期停止使用，应将泵拆洗上油，妥善保存。
9. Trouble shooting
故障解除
If the pump is not functioned, please process according to trouble-shooting sheet as
follow: 如果水泵运行不正常，请根据如下指导检查修正：
Fault Cause Action

故障原因措施
The pump has no or too low 1. Wrong direction of Correct direction
capacity rotation 修正转向
泵没有或流量过低水泵转向错误
2. piping system choked Clean

管路堵塞清洁
3. the pump is clogged Clean

水泵堵塞清洁
4. Suction line leaks pump Find leakage and rectify

takes air 找到渗漏点，修正
水泵吸口管路渗漏
5. Suction lift too high Wrong positioning of pump

吸口高度过高 And rectify
水泵安装位置不准确
6. Pump and piping system Keep pump with same size of

wrongly dimensioned piping
水泵和管路尺寸不符合修正安装尺寸
High power consumption of 1. High counter-pressure Check the back pressure of

pump 背压过高 piping system
水泵消耗功率过大检查管路的背压
2. The liquid is heavier than Check the liquid viscosity,

water which is corresponding to
Page 152 of 188

液体黏度大于水 motor power.
检查液体黏度，需要对应于
马达功率
3. Foreign clogging inside Dismantle the pump, remove

pump casing clogging.
泵壳内有异物堵塞拆卸水泵，取出堵塞物
4. Electric motor running in Check cable connection, and

2 phase correct them.
马达缺相检查电缆连接，并修正
The pump makes noise 1. Cavitation in pump Suction lift too high
水泵噪音过大水泵有气蚀 Suction line wrong
High temperature
High viscosity of liquid
吸高过高
吸口管路安装错误
液体温度过高
液体黏度过高
2. Worn out of bearing Renew

轴承磨损更新
3. Impeller loose Check and tighten it
叶轮松脱检查并旋紧
10. Inspection and maintenance

检查和维护
Check the mechanical seal leakage in regular intervals. Check the current of motor in
rated or not. Check noise as normal or not.
每隔一定时间，检查机械轴封是否有渗漏，检查马达电流是否在额定范围内，检查
噪声是否正常。
Before inspection of pump, please make sure main power has been shut down, and the
system is to be without pressure and liquid drained completely. The repairman must be
familiar with the type of liquid which has been pumped as well as the safety measures he
is to take when handling the liquid.
在检查水泵前确保主电源已经切断，泵体内没有压力，残水已经泻放完。维修人员
必须熟悉水泵以及指导所输送的液体，并作相应的措施。
10.1Drain the pump

泻放水泵
When the piping system has been drained, note that there is still liquid in the pump.
Remove the liquid by unplug pump casing.
Page 153 of 188

当管路泻放完后，注意水泵内还是有残水，打开水泵底部闷头泻放残水。
10.2Bearing maintenance
轴承维护
The pump motor is equipped with a ball bearing which is dimensioned for a nominal
life of 15000 working hours. The bearing is lubricated for life and requires no
attention but is to be replaced in case of noise or bearing wear.
水泵马达安装相应尺寸的轴承，每15000小时需要更换检修。轴承是带润滑油
无维护型，但有噪音及过大磨损是需要予以更换
11. Drawing with part list

图纸及零件清单
Page 154 of 188

6 5 4 3 2 1
459
D A-A D
227 n125
140
4×n12
A A
90
90
18
4×M10
125 15
434 88
C C
OUTLET DN40 PN1.0

(GB 569-65)
INLET DN65 PN1.0

(GB 569-65)
162
B B
197
Model: 2PWF-11B
Capacity: 20m3/h
Water head: 0.11Mpa
Casing: Cast iron
n120 Impeller: Stainless steel
Shaft: Stainless steel
n90

252
A3 27-00-13-00 1 /2
HANSUN
DRAWN 2010-8-17 joyce
4×n15 CHECK 2010-8-18 molly
A APPR. 2010-8-18 matthew Marine Technology A
REV v1.0
Circulation macerating pump ID NO
27-00-13-00
6 5 4 Page 155 of 188 3 2 1
6 5 4 3 2 1
D D
3 15 14 11 17 18 12 6 13 10
19 7 8 9
C 19 2 Bearing 27-00-13-17 C
18 8 Gasket 00-02-10-01
17 8 Hexagon bolt 04-22-10-25
16 1 Fasten nut 27-00-13-16
15 1 Secure ring 27-00-13-15
14 1 Spring clip 27-00-13-14
13 1 Key 27-00-13-13
12 1 Gasket 27-00-13-12
11 1 Front motor cover 27-00-13-11
10 1 Rotor 27-00-13-10
9 1 Motor cover 27-00-13-09
8 1 Fan 27-00-13-08
B B
7 1 Back motor cover 27-00-13-07
6 1 Motor stator 27-00-13-06
5 1 Gasket 27-00-13-05
4 1 Mechanical seal 27-00-13-04
3 1 Pump skid 27-00-13-03
2 1 Impeller 27-00-13-02
1 1 Pump casing 27-00-13-01
IT QT DESCRIPTION ID NUMBER
1 5 16 2 4 A3 27-00-13-00 2 /2
HANSUN
DRAWN 2010-8-17 joyce
CHECK 2010-8-18 molly
A APPR. 2010-8-18 matthew Marine Technology A
REV v1.0
Circulation macerating pump ID NO
27-00-13-00 -01
6 5 4 Page 156 of 188 3 2 1
English
Installation, Operation
and Maintenance Instructions
CB Range
sizes 07/14/15
OMMP/016/01/R12
Page 157 of 188
Spares & Service Contact Details
Mono UK
Spares +44 (0)161 214 2380 (direct line 8.15 am – 5.00 pm)
E-mail spares@mono-pumps.com
Service +44 (0)161 214 2390 (direct line 8.15 am – 5.00 pm)
E-mail customerservices@mono-pumps.com
Service +44 (0)161 339 9000 (24 hrs)
Mono Australia
Telephone Facsimile
Melbourne (03) 9580 5211 (03) 9580 9036
Sydney (02) 9521 5611 (02) 9542 3649
Brisbane (07) 3350 4582 (07) 3350 3750
Adelaide (08) 8447 8333 (08) 8447 8373
Perth (08) 9479 0444 (08) 9479 0400
Darwin (08) 8984 3099 (08) 8947 0540
Tasmania 0417 345 814 (03) 6330 2051
E-mail ozsales@mono-pumps.com
Mono New Zealand

Spares & Service +64 (0)9 829 0333
E-mail info@mono-pumps.co.nz
Monoflo USA
Spares & Service +1 713 466 7999
E-mail inquire@monoflo.com
Monoflo South America

Spares & Service +54 4296 8997 +54 4284 0323
E-mail inquire@monoflo.com
Mono China
Telephone Facsimile
Beijing +86 (0) 10 6461 1115 +86 (0) 10 8486 8481
Shanghai +86 (0) 21 5915 7168 +86 (0) 21 5915 6863
E-mail monoshanghai@nov.com
Spares & Service

Issued – April 2008
Page 158 of 188
ATEX Warning Statements
PUMPS AND PUMP UNITS Where there may be a risk of an accumulation of

explosive gases or dust non-sparking tools should be
Where a pump or pump unit is to be installed in a used for installation and maintenance.
potentially explosive atmosphere ensure that this has

been specified at the time of purchase and that the In addition to causing permanent damage to the
equipment has been supplied accordingly and stator, dry running of the pump could generate a rapid
displays an ATEX nameplate or is supplied with a rise in the temperature of the stator tube or barrel,
certificate of conformity. If there is any doubt as to the which could become an ignition source. It is therefore
suitability of the equipment please contact Mono essential that a dry run protection device be fitted.
Pumps Limited before commencing with installation This must shut the pump down immediately should a
and commissioning. dry run situation occur. Details of suitable devices are
available from Mono Pumps Limited.
Process liquids or fluids should be kept within

specified temperature limits otherwise the surface of To minimise the risk of sparking or temperature rises
pump or system components may become an ignition due to mechanical or electrical overload the following
source due to temperature rises. Where the process control and safety devices should be fitted in addition
liquid temperature is less that 90ºC the maximum to a dry run protection system. A pressure relief
surface temperature will not exceed 90ºC provided system whereby the pump can not generate
the pump is installed, operated and maintained in pressures in excess of the maximum rated pressure
accordance with this manual. Where the process fluid or an over pressure device which should shut the
temperature exceeds 90ºC the maximum surface pump down when the maximum discharge pressure is
temperature will be equal to the maximum process exceeded. A control system that will shut the pump
fluid temperature. down if the motor current or temperature exceed

specified limits. An isolator switch that will disconnect
Cavities that could allow the accumulation of all electrical supply to the motor and ancillary
explosive gases, such as under guards, should where electrical equipment and be capable of being locked
possible, be designed out of the system. Where this is in the off position. All control and safety devices
not possible they should be fully purged before any should be fitted, operated and maintained in
work is carried out on the pump or system. accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. All
valves on the system should be open when the pump
is started otherwise serious mechanical overload and
Electrical installation and maintenance work should
failure may result.
only be carried out by suitably qualified and
competent persons and must be in accordance with
relevant electrical regulations. It is important that the pump rotates in the direction
indicated on the nameplate. This must be checked on
installation and commissioning and after any
All electrical equipment, including control and safety
maintenance has been carried out. Failure to observe
devices, should be suitably rated for the environment
this may lead to dry running or mechanical or
in to which they are installed.
electrical overload.
ATEX - Page 1 of 2
Issued – February 2004
Reference - OMMP/028/01/R1
Page 159 of 188
ATEX Warning Statements
When fitting drives, couplings, belts, pulleys and The use of replacement parts that are not
guards to a pump or pump unit it is essential that manufactured by or approved by Mono Pumps Limited
these are correctly fitted, aligned and adjusted in may affect the safe operation of the pump and it may
accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. therefore become a safety hazard to both operators
Failure to do so may result in sparking due to and other equipment. In these circumstances the
unintended mechanical contact or temperature rises Declaration provided will become invalid. The
due to mechanical or electrical overload or slipping of guarantee referenced on the Terms and Conditions of
drive belts. Regular inspection of these parts must be Sale will also be invalidated.
carried out to ensure they are in good condition and
replacement of any suspect part must be carried out
immediately.
Mechanical seals should be suitably rated for the

environment. The seal and any associated
equipment, such as a flushing system, must be
installed, operated and maintained in accordance with
the manufacturer’s instructions.
Where a packed gland seal is fitted this must be

correctly fitted and adjusted. This type of seal relies
on the process liquid to cool the shaft and packing
rings so a constant drip of liquid from the gland
section is required. Where this is undesirable an
alternative seal type should be fitted.
Failure to operate or maintain the pump and ancillary

equipment in line with the manufacturer’s instructions
may lead to premature and potentially dangerous
failure of components. Regular inspection, and where
necessary replacement, of bearings and lubrication is
essential.
The pump and its components have been designed to

ensure safe operation within the guidelines covered
by legislation. Accordingly Mono Pumps Limited have
declared the machine safe to use for the duty
specified as defined by the Declaration of
Incorporation or Conformity that is issued with this
instruction manual.
ATEX - Page 2 of 2
Issued – February 2004
Reference - OMMP/028/01/R1
Page 160 of 188
Index
SECTION 1 INSTALLATION
START-UP PROCEDURE
ASSEMBLY AND DISMANTLING ADVICE
SECTION 2 FAULT FINDING
SECTION 3 DRAWING REFERENCE NUMBERS
PUMP CODING SHEET
SECTION 4 DISMANTLING AND ASSEMBLY DIAGRAMS
EXPLODED VIEWS
SECTION 5 TORQUE TIGHTENING FIGURES
SECTION 6 MONO PRODUCTS
EC Declaration as defined by Machinery Directive 98/37/EC.

EC Declaration of Incorporation EC Declaration of Conformity
This declaration is only valid when the machinery has This declaration is only valid when the machinery has been
been supplied without drive unit. supplied with drive unit.
In this case, the machinery meets the requirements of the In this case the machinery meets the requirements of the
said directive and is intended for incorporation into other said directive including any amendments which are valid at
machinery or for assembly with other machinery in order the time of supply.
to constitute relevant machinery as defined by the said
directive including any amendments, which are valid at the
time of supply.
IMPORTANT IMPORTANT
This machinery must not be put into service until the This declaration is only valid when the machinery has been
relevant machinery into which it is to be incorporated has installed, operated and maintained in accordance with these
been declared in conformity to the said directive. instructions and safety guidelines contained within as well
as instructions supplied for equipment assembled with or
This declaration is only valid when the machinery has intended for use with this equipment.
been installed, operated and maintained in accordance
with these instructions and safety guidelines contained
within as well as instructions supplied for equipment
assembled with or intended for use with this equipment.
The following harmonised standards are applicable:

BS EN 809
BS EN ISO 12100 Parts 1 & 2 Mr G.D. Thomas, Chief Engineer
Index
Issued – November 2004
Page 161 of 188

Installation, Operation & Maintenance Instructions
INSTALLATION Normally 'P' range pumps will be designed with a
sole plate that will be bolted to the customers
1.1 INSTALLATION AND SAFETY framework.
RECOMMENDATIONS
If the pump is to be mounted in any way other than
In common with other items of process plant a pump described above, confirmation of the installation
must be installed correctly to ensure satisfactory and must be agreed with Mono Pumps Limited. All the
safe operation. The pump must also be maintained pipework should be independently supported.
to a suitable standard. Following these
recommendations will ensure that the safety of 1.3.1 HANDLING
personnel and satisfactory operation of the pump is
achieved. During installation and maintenance, attention must
be paid to the safe handling of all items. Where a
1.2.1. GENERAL pump or its components weigh in excess of 20 kg
(45lb) it is recommended that suitable lifting tackle
When handling harmful or objectionable materials, should be used to ensure that personal injury or
adequate ventilation must be provided in order to damage to components does not occur.
disperse dangerous concentrations of vapours. It is
recommended that wherever possible, Mono pumps For safe handling of both bareshaft pumps and
should be installed with provision for adequate pump units (pump/ gearbox/motor etc.) slings should
lighting, thus ensuring that effective maintenance be used. The position of the slings will depend upon
can be carried out in satisfactory conditions. With the specific pump/unit construction and should be
certain product materials, a hosing down facility with carried out by personnel with the relevant
adequate draining will simplify maintenance and experience to ensure that the pump is not damaged
prolong the life of pump components. and injury to personnel does not occur.
1.2.2. SYSTEM DESIGN & INSTALLATION If eyebolts do exist then these should only be used
for lifting the individual components for which they
At the system design stage, consideration must be are supplied.
given to provision of filler plugs, and the installation
of non-return and/or isolating valves. Pumps cannot 1.3.2 STORAGE AND INFREQUENT OPERATION
be reliably used as non-return valves. Pumps in
parallel and those with high static discharge head The situation where a pump is used infrequently is
must be fitted with non-return valves. also covered by the instructions in this section.
The pumps must also be protected by suitable SHORT TERM STORAGE

devices against over pressure and dry running.
Where a pump has to be stored for 6 months or
i. HORIZONTAL MOUNTING less then the following steps are advised:-
All ranges excluding P Range Mono pumps are 1. Store pump inside wherever possible or if this is not
normally installed in a horizontal position with feasible then provide protective covering. Do not
baseplates mounted on a flat surface, grouted in allow moisture to collect around the pump.
and bolted, thus ensuring firm fixing and a reduction
in noise and vibration. 2. Remove the drain plug, if fitted. Any inspection
plates fitted should also be removed to ensure that
The unit should be checked after bolting down to the suction housing can drain and dry completely.
ensure that the alignment of the pump to its prime
mover is correct. 3. Loosen the packed gland and inject sufficient grease
into the stuffing box. Tighten the gland nut hand
ii. VERTICAL MOUNTING tight. If a water flush system is to be used do not
grease, a small amount of light oil is recommended
P Range Pumps Only for these.
The P range pumps are intended for vertical 4. See Manufacturers Instructions for
installation. Care must be taken when lifting the motor/gearbox/drive instructions for storage
pump into the vertical position. procedures.
Section 1, Page 1
Issued – December 2002
Page 162 of 188

LONG TERM STORAGE When both are installed it is advised that the relief
valve is positioned closer to the pump than the non-
If the pump is to be kept in storage for more than return valve.
six months then in addition to the above the
following procedures should be carried out IMPORTANT
regularly (every 2 - 3 weeks if possible):
The pump must never run against a closed inlet
1. If practicable rotate the pump at least three quarters or outlet valve, as this could result in
of one revolution to avoid the rotor setting in the mechanical failure.
stator.
1.6 GENERAL SAFETY
2. Note, however, that the pump is not to be rotated for
more than two revolutions each time because GREAT CARE MUST BE TAKEN TO PROTECT
damage could be caused to the rotor/ stator ALL ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT FROM
elements. SPLASHING WHEN HOSING DOWN. WHERE
MONO PUMPS LIMITED HAVE SUPPLIED A
IMMEDIATELY PRIOR TO INSTALLATION AND BARESHAFT PUMP THE ONUS IS ON THE USER
STARTING TO FIT ADEQUATE GUARDS IN COMPLIANCE
WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE RELEVANT
Before installing the pump please ensure that all REGULATIONS.
plugs and inspection plates are replaced and
that excess grease/oil is removed from the All nuts and bolts, securing flanges and base
stuffing box. mounting fixtures must be checked for tightness
before operation. To eliminate vibration, the pump
1.4 ELECTRICAL must be correctly aligned with the drive unit, and all
guards must be securely fixed in position. When
Electrical connection should only be made using commissioning the plant, all joints in the system
equipment suitable for both rating and environment. must be checked thoroughly for leakage.
Where any doubts exist regarding the suitability of
equipment, Mono Pumps Limited, should be If, when starting, the pump does not appear to
consulted before proceeding. Normally the Mono operate correctly (see 2), the plant must be shut
pump should be installed with starting equipment down immediately and the cause of the malfunction
arranged to give direct on line starting. established before operations are recommenced. It
is recommended that depending upon plant system
Earthing points will be provided on electric drives (if operation, either a combined vacuum and pressure
supplied) and it is essential that these are correctly gauge, or a vacuum gauge only be fitted to the
connected. When the motor is being wired and pump inlet port, and a pressure gauge fitted to the
checked for rotation, the start/stop sequence must outlet port, these will then continuously monitor the
be instantaneous to prevent dry running (see 2) or pump operating conditions.
pressurising upstream equipment. (Check direction
arrow on pump nameplate). The electrical 1.7 DUTY CONDITIONS
installation should include appropriate isolating
equipment to ensure that the pump unit is safe to Pumps should only be installed on duties for which
work on. Mono Pumps Limited have specified the materials of
construction, flow rates, pressure, temperature,
1.5 PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES AND NON-RETURN speed etc. Where dangerous materials are to be
VALVES pumped, consideration must be given to the safe
discharge from relief valves, gland drains etc.
1. It is recommended that a suitable safety device is
installed on the discharge side of the pump to IF THE DUTY SHOULD BE CHANGED, MONO
prevent over-pressurisation of the system. PUMPS LIMITED SHOULD BE CONTACTED AND
THEIR RECOMMENDATIONS SOUGHT IN THE
2. It is also recommended that a non-return valve is INTEREST OF APPLICATION, SAFETY OF
installed on the discharge side of the pump to PLANT, EFFICIENCY AND PUMP LIFE.
prevent reverse flow through the system.
Section 1, Page 2
Page 163 of 188

2. START-UP PROCEDURE 2.3.1. GLAND PACKING
Pumps must be filled with liquid before starting. The Where a pump is supplied fitted with gland packing
initial filling is not for priming purposes, but to (manufactured from a non-asbestos material), the
provide the necessary lubrication of the stator until gland will require adjustment during the initial
the pump primes itself. When the pump is stopped, running in period. Newly packed glands must be
sufficient liquid will normally be trapped in the allowed to r un-in with only finger tight compression
rotor/stator assembly to provide lubrication upon re- on the gland follower nuts. This should continue for
starting. about 3 days. The gland follower should be
gradually tightened over the next week to achieve a
If, however, the pump has been left standing for an leakage rate as shown in the table below. Gland
appreciable time, moved to a new location, or has followers should be adjusted at regular intervals to
been dismantled and re-assembled, it must be maintain the recommended leakage flow rate.
refilled with liquid and given a few turns before Under normal working conditions a slight drip from
starting. The pump is normally somewhat stiff to the gland under pressure assists in cooling and
turn by hand owing to the close rotor/stator fit. lubricating the packing. A correctly adjusted
However, this stiffness disappears when the pump is gland will always have small leakage of fluid.
running normally against pressure.
Typical Leakage Rates from Packed Glands
2.1 DRY RUNNING
Up to 50mm shaft diameter 2 drops per minute
NEVER RUN THE PUMP IN A DRY CONDITION 50 … 75mm shaft diameter 3 drops per minute
EVEN FOR A FEW REVOLUTIONS OR THE 75 … 100mm shaft diameter 4 drops per minute
STATOR WILL BE DAMAGED IMMEDIATELY. 100 … 125mm shaft diameter 5 drops per minute
CONTINUAL DRY RUNNING COULD PRODUCE 125 … 160mm shaft diameter 6 drops per minute
SOME HARMFUL OR DAMAGING EFFECTS.
A gland drip is, however, undesirable when handling
2.2 PUMP ROTATION DETAILS corrosive, degreasing, or abrasive materials. Under
these conditions the gland must be tightened the
PUMP RANGE BI-DIRECTIONAL COMMENT
minimum amount whilst the pump is running to
E Yes † ensure satisfactory sealing when under pressure, or
Monobloc B Yes † to stop entry of air when under suction conditions.
Merlin Industrial Yes †
S, SL Yes †
LF Yes † The gland leakage of toxic, corrosive or hazardous
W No ** liquids can cause problems of compatibility with the
Merlin Widethroat No ** pumps materials of construction.
MM ML No *
MS No **
G No * Provision of a gland drain should be considered,
CB/SB No * especially for the leakage of hazardous products.
Placer No **
Grout Injection No **
P No * CARE IS REQUIRED WHEN ADJUSTING THE
CP0011 No ** GLAND WHILST PUMP IS RUNNING.
CP0025,CP0800,CP1600 No *
* Clockwise when viewed from drive end. 2.3.2 MECHANICAL SEALS - ALL PUMPS
** Anti-clockwise when viewed from drive end.
† Anti-clockwise gives inlet at drive end. When a mechanical seal is fitted to the pump it may
be necessary to provide a barrier fluid to some part
DIRECTIONS OF ROTATION of the seal. This should be provided in line with the
seal manufacturers instructions.
BEFORE THE DIRECTION OF ROTATION IS
CHANGED, MONO PUMPS LIMITED MUST BE 2.4. GUARDS
CONSULTED SO THAT THE SUITABILITY OF
THE PUMP CAN BE CONFIRMED WHEN In the interests of safety, and in accordance with the
OPERATING ON THE NEW DUTY. U.K. Health and Safety at Work Act 1974, all guards
must be replaced after necessary adjustments have
been made to the pump.
Section 1, Page 3
Page 164 of 188

2.5 WARNING/CONTROL DEVICE BP LC2 / Mobilgrease XHP 222 or their equivalent
must be used for replenishment.
Prior to operating the pump, if any warning or control
devices are fitted these must be set in accordance 2.9 PUMP UNITS
with their specific instructions.
Where a pump unit is dismantled and re-assembled,
2.6 PUMP OPERATING TEMPERATURE consideration must be given to ensure that where
appropriate the following steps are covered.
The range of temperatures the pump surfaces will
develop is dependent upon factors such as product 1. Correct alignment of pump/gearbox
temperature and ambient temperature of the 2. Use of appropriate couplings & bushes
installation. There may be instances where the 3. Use of appropriate belts & pulleys correctly
external pump surface can exceed 50oC. tensioned.
In these instances, personnel must be made aware 2.10 CLEANING PRIOR TO OPERATION
of this and suitable warnings/guarding used.
i. Non Food Use
2.7 NOISE LEVELS
During the commissioning of a new pump or
1. The noise sound pressure level will not exceed recommissioning of an overhauled pump, it is
85dB at one metre distance from the pump. advisable to clean the pump prior to the initial
operation of the pump in the process.
2. This is based on a typical installation and does not
necessarily include noise from other sources or any ii. Food Use
contribution from building reverberation.
When a pump has been supplied for a food
3. For pumps identified below, the noise levels vary application, it is important to ensure that the pump is
between 85 and 95dB but will not exceed 95dB at clean prior to initial operation of the pump.
one metre distance from the pump.
Therefore, it is important that a clean-in-place
Pump Sizes (based on E Range Pumping treatment is executed on the pump at the following
Element) times:-
Single Stage Size 12 and above 1. When the pump is first commissioned for use.
Two Stage Size 9 and above
Four Stage Size 7 and above 2. When any spare components are fitted into the
Six Stage Size 7 and above wetted area of the pump.
Eight Stage Size 6 and above
A recommended CIP procedure is as follows:
2.8 LUBRICATION
This procedure should not be used on the CP
Pumps fitted with bearings should be inspected Pump Range. Please consult our application
periodically to see if grease replenishment is engineers for a suitable procedure.
necessary, and if so, grease should be added until
the chambers at the ends of the bearing spacer are Caustic Wash
approximately one third full. LQ94 ex Lever Diversey or equivalent
2% concentration
Periodic bearing inspection is necessary to maintain
optimum bearing performance. The most expedient Acid Wash
time to inspect is during periods of regular P3 Horolith 617 ex Henkel
scheduled equipment downtime - for routine Ecolab or equivalent 1% concentration
maintenance or for any other reason.
Procedure
Under tropical or other arduous conditions, however,
a more frequent examination may be necessary. It 1. Caustic wash @ 75°C for 20 mins
is therefore advisable to establish a correct 2. Water rinse @ 80°C for 20 mins
maintenance schedule or periodic inspection.
Section 1, Page 4
Page 165 of 188

3. Acid wash @ 50°C for 20 mins 2.13 ACCESS PORTS
4. Water rinse @ 80°C for 20 mins
Where access ports are fitted then the following
CIP flow rates (hence pump speeds) should be steps must be followed prior to removal:
maximised to achieve highest level of cleanability.
1. Pump must be shut down and the electrical supply
A C.I.P. liquid velocity of 1.5 to 2.0 m/s is required isolated.
for removal of solids and soiling.
2. Protective clothing should be worn, especially if the
Pumps fitted with CIP by pass ports will permit pumped product is obnoxious.
higher flow rates without the need to increase pump
speed. 3. Remove access plate with care utilising where
possible drip trays to collect product leakage.
The use of neat active caustic
and acid chemicals is not Access ports are included to assist in removing
recommended. Proprietary cleaning blockages and to allow a visual check on the
agents should be used in line with manufacturers components within the suction chamber.
instructions.
It is not to be considered as an additional method in
All seals and gaskets should be dismantling the pump.
replaced with new if disturbed
during maintenance. Re-assembly of the plate should be completed using
new gaskets prior to the pump being switched on.
Pump internals should be regularly inspected to
ensure hygienic integrity is maintained, especially 2.14 ADJUSTABLE STATORS
with respect to elastomeric components and seals,
and replaced if necessary. If adjustable stators are fitted then the following
steps must be followed for adjusting the clamping
The four stages constitute one cycle and we devices.
recommend that this cycle is used to clean the pump
before use on food. The adjustable stator assembly is designed to give
an even compression around the stator
Once the pump has been commissioned, the circumference. It is designed to be used when
cleaning process will depend upon the application. pump performance reduces through wear to an
The user must therefore ensure that their cleaning unacceptable level, to restore the required flow rate.
procedures are suitable for the duty for which the
pump has been purchased. The stator compression is increased using the
following steps:-
2.11 WIDETHROAT PUMPS
1. Release the six locking screws half a turn.
Specific pumps may have auger feed screws, with
2. Tighten the eight clamp screws until adjustment
or without a bridge breaker system to feed the
allowed by releasing the lock screws has been taken
pumping element. If the pump installation requires
up.
that these cannot be enclosed, care must be taken
to ensure personnel cannot gain access whilst the 3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 until the pump performance
pump is operating. If this is not possible an has been restored to its former level.
emergency stop device must be fitted nearby.
NOTE
2.12 EXPLOSIVE PRODUCTS/ HAZARDOUS
ATMOSPHERES It is imperative that when adjusting the stator that
only sufficient pressure is placed on the stator to
In certain instances the product being pumped may enable the capacity of the pump to be reinstated.
well be of a hazardous nature.
Over tightening of the stator could easily result in
In these installations consideration must be given to damage to the driver by overload and so extreme
provide suitable protection and appropriate warnings care must be taken when carrying out these
to safeguard personnel and plant. adjustments.
Section 1, Page 5
Page 166 of 188

It is therefore advisable to make the adjustment 2.15.4 FLEXISHAFT DRIVE PUMPS

while the pump is running and power readings can
be monitored. With this design there are no wearing items to
replace in the drive train, however, if during routine
REMOVAL OF ADJUSTABLE STATOR inspection the shaft is visibly damaged / distorted
or the protective coating is damaged, then this item
The procedure for removal of an adjustable stator is should be replaced to avoid unexpected
the same as that of a standard one, except it is breakdowns.
necessary to remove the clamp plates before the
stator can be twisted off the rotor. 2.16 MECHANICAL SPEED VARIATORS
This can be done by undoing the clamp screws; Refer to the manufacturers instructions.
then releasing the clamp plate by using the locking
screws as jacking screws to remove the clamp These machines require regular maintenance, which
plates. typically includes weekly adjustment through the full
speed range.
Re-assembly will be done using the reverse
procedure. 3.0 ASSEMBLY AND DISMANTLING
2.15 MAINTENANCE OF WEARING COMPONENTS Section 4 contains the steps to dismantle and
re-assemble the pump. All fastenings must be
2.15.1 ROTOR AND STATOR tightened securely and when identified the
appropriate torque figures should be used.
The wear rate on these components is dependent
on many factors, such as product abrasivity, speed, 3.1 USE OF ITEMS NOT APPROVED OR
pressure etc. MANUFACTURED BY MONO PUMPS LIMITED
When pump performance has reduced to an The pump and its components have been designed
unacceptable level one or possibly both items will to ensure that the pump will operate safely within the
need replacing. guidelines covered by the legislation.
2.15.2 DRIVE SHAFT - PACKED GLAND As a consequence Mono Pumps Limited have
declared the machine safe to use for the duty
The wear rate of the gland area is dependent on specified as defined by the Declaration of
many factors such as product abrasivity and speed. Incorporation or Conformity that is issued with this
Regular gland maintenance will maximise the life of Instruction Manual.
the shaft. Replacement of both the gland packing
and shaft will be necessary when shaft sealing The use of replacement items that are not approved
becomes difficult to achieve. by or manufactured by Mono Pumps Limited may
affect the safe operation of the pump and it may
2.15.3 COUPLING ROD JOINTS therefore become a safety hazard to both operators
and other equipment. In these instances the
Regular maintenance and lubrication will maximise Declaration provided will therefore become invalid.
life of the joints. The guarantee referenced in the Terms and
Conditions of Sale will also be invalidated if
Replacement of one or both joint assemblies and replacement items are used that are not approved or
possibly the coupling rod may be necessary when manufactured by Mono Pumps Limited.
wear is apparent.
DISPOSAL OF WORN COMPONENTS
It is essential to replace all the joint items with
genuine Mono parts to ensure maximum life. When replacing wearing parts, please ensure
disposal of used parts is carried out in compliance
with local environmental legislation. Particular care
should be taken when disposing of lubricants.
Section 1, Page 6
Page 167 of 188

Diagnostic Chart
SYMPTOMS POSSIBLE CAUSES

1. NO DISCHARGE 1. 2. 3. 7. 26. 28. 29.
2. LOSS OF CAPACITY 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 22. 13. 16. 17. 21. 22. 23. 29
3. IRREGULAR DISCHARGE 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 13. 15. 29.
4. PRIMING LOST AFTER START 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 13. 15
5. PUMP STALLS AT START UP 8. 11. 24.
6. PUMP OVERHEATS 8. 9. 11. 12. 18. 20
7. MOTOR OVERHEATS 8. 11. 12. 15. 18. 20.
8. EXCESSIVE POWER ABSORBED BY PUMP 8. 11. 12. 15. 18. 20
9. NOISE AND VIBRATION 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 11. 13. 15. 18. 19. 20. 22. 23. 27. 31
10. PUMP ELEMENT WEAR 9. 11.
11. EXCESSIVE GLAND OR SEAL WEAR 12. 14. 25. 30.
12. GLAND LEAKAGE 13. 14.
13. SEIZURE 9. 11. 12. 20.
LIST OF CAUSES REMEDIAL ACTIONS
1. INCORRECT DIRECTION OF ROTATION 1. REVERSE MOTOR
2. PUMP UNPRIMED 2. BLEED SYSTEM OF AIR/GAS
3. INSUFFICIENT N.P.S.H. AVAILABLE 3. INCREASE SUCTION HEAD OR REDUCE SPEED/TEMP.
4. PRODUCT VAPORISING IN SUPPLY LINE 4. INCREASE N.P.S.H. AVAILABLE (SEE 3 ABOVE)
5. AIR ENTERING SUPPLY LINE 5. CHECK PIPE JOINTS/GLAND ADJUSTMENT
6. INSUFFICIENT HEAD ABOVE SUPPLY VESSEL OUTLET 6. RAISE VESSEL/INCREASE PIPE SIZE
7. FOOTVALVE/STRAINER OBSTRUCTED OR BLOCKED 7. CLEAN OUT SUCTION LINE/VALVES
8. PRODUCT VISCOSITY ABOVE RATED FIGURE 8. DECREASE PUMP SPEED/INCREASE TEMP.
9. PRODUCT TEMP. ABOVE RATED FIGURE 9. COOL THE PRODUCT
10. PRODUCT VISCOSITY BELOW RATED FIGURE 10. INCREASE PUMP SPEED/REDUCE TEMP.
11. DELIVERY PRESSURE ABOVE RATED FIGURE 11. CHECK FOR BLOCKAGES IN DELIVERY LINE
12. GLAND OVERTIGHT 12. ADJUST GLAND SEE O&M INSTRUCTIONS
13. GLAND UNDERTIGHT 13. ADJUST GLAND SEE O&M INSTRUCTIONS
14. GLAND FLUSHING INADEQUATE 14. CHECK FLUID FLOWS FREELY INTO GLAND
15. PUMP SPEED ABOVE RATED FIGURE 15. DECREASE PUMP SPEED
16. PUMP SPEED BELOW RATED FIGURE 16. INCREASE PUMP SPEED
17. BELT DRIVE SLIPPING 17. RE-TENSION BELTS
18. COUPLING MISALIGNED 18. CHECK AND ADJUST ALIGNMENT
19. INSECURE PUMP/DRIVE MOUNTING 19. CHECK AND TIGHTEN ALL PUMP MOUNTINGS
20. SHAFT BEARING WEAR/FAILURE 20. REPLACE BEARINGS
21. WORN PUMP ELEMENT 21. FIT NEW PARTS
22. RELIEF VALVE CHATTER 22. CHECK CONDITION OF VALVE/RENEW
23. R.V. INCORRECTLY SET 23. RE-ADJUST SPRING COMPRESSION
24. LOW VOLTAGE 24. CHECK VOLTAGE/WIRING SIZES
25. PRODUCT ENTERING PACKING AREA 25. CHECK PACKING CONDITION AND TYPE
26. DRIVE TRAIN BREAKAGE 26. CHECK AND REPLACE BROKEN COMPONENTS
27. NEGATIVE OR VERY LOW DELIVERY HEAD 27. CLOSE DELIVERY VALVE SLIGHTLY
28. DISCHARGE BLOCKED/VALVE CLOSED 28. REVERSE PUMP/RELIEVE PRESSURE/CLEAR BLOCKAGES
29. STATOR TURNING 29. REPLACE WORN PARTS/TIGHTEN UP STATOR BOLTS
30. STUFFING BOX 'EATS' PACKING 30. CHECK FOR WORN SHAFT AND REPLACE
31. VEE BELTS 31. CHECK AND ADJUST TENSION OR REPLACE
Section 2, Page 1
Page 168 of 188

Drawing Reference Numbers
DRG. DESCRIPTION
REF
06A NAMEPLATE
10A MECHANICAL SEAL
15A THROWER GUARD
21A BARREL
22A STATOR
24A END COVER
25A ROTOR
26A COUPLING
31A WASHER
32A SHAFT
65A GLAND SECTION
95A TIE ROD
P101 SEAL
P102 CAP SCREW
P103 CAP SCREW
P104 HEXAGON NUT
P105 WASHER
P106 WASHER
P107 HEXAGON NUT
P108 WASHER
P109 WASHER
P110 CAP SCREW
P111 WASHER
P112 DRIVE SCREW
P113 WASHER
P114 DRIVE SCREW
IMPORTANT NOTE
THE DRAWING REFERENCES SHOWN GIVE THE DESCRIPTION OF ALL THE PARTS DETAILED ON THE SECTIONAL
DRAWINGS IN THIS SECTION OF THE BOOK. THEREFORE SOME OF THE REFERENCES MAY NOT BE SHOWN ON
ANY ONE.
Section 3, Page 1
Page 169 of 188

Pump Coding
STD.
BASIC PUMP CODE
VARIATION
FEATURES DESCRIPTION
1 2 3 4 5 6 / 8 9 10
Cast Iron C
BODY
MATERIALS
Stainless Steel S
Low flow, low pressure, balanced stator,

RANGE flexible coupling design. Suction and B
delivery ½" B.S.P. (female)
0.11 m³/h (110 l/h) @ 2850 rev/min 0 7

NOMINAL
CAPACITY AT
0.16 m³/h (160 l/h) @ 1450 rev/min 1 4
MAX. SPEED AND
ZERO PRESSURE
0.60 m³/h (600 l/h) @ 2850 rev/min 1 5
STATOR MATERIAL RB, RR, RV, RW R
ROTATING PARTS 5, 8 8
Stainless Steel. B15 pump with Grade R

TYPICAL BASIC
S B 1 5 R 8
PUMP CODING
(Nitrile) stator, HCP rotor and shaft
‘H’ Home (SB pumps only)

MARKET
‘G’ Close coupled drive supplied (CB pumps only) C B 1 4 R 5 / G
VARIATIONS
‘X’ Close coupled drive not supplied (CB pumps only)
FULL PUMP CODE TO BE STAMPED ON PUMP NAMEPLATE
Section 3, Page 2
Issued – November 2004
Page 170 of 188

Dismantling & Assembly Diagrams
DISCHARGE
PORT
CB RANGE
SUCTION
PORT
Section 4, Page 1
Issued – August 2004
Page 171 of 188

Dis mantling P roc edure
Section 4, Page 2
Page 172 of 188

Section 4, Page 3
Page 173 of 188

4
c
250º
B 07 ONL Y
Section 4, Page 4
Issued – July 2005
Page 174 of 188

4
c
250º
B 14/15 ONL Y
Section 4, Page 5
Page 175 of 188

Section 4, Page 6
Page 176 of 188

c
250º
6
Section 4, Page 7
Page 177 of 188

Section 4, Page 8
Page 178 of 188

Re-assembly Procedure
Section 4, Page 9
Page 179 of 188

RS494-124
LOCTITE 648
9
Section 4, Page 10
Page 180 of 188

10
Section 4, Page 11
Page 181 of 188

12
LOCTITE 648
11
B07 ONLY
Section 4, Page 12
Page 182 of 188

12
LOCTITE 648
B14/15 ONLY
11
Section 4, Page 13
Page 183 of 188

13
Section 4, Page 14
Page 184 of 188

14
Section 4, Page 15
Page 185 of 188

CB07/CB14/CB15
21A
Section 4, Page 16
P108
P109
P103
????
22A P114
Exploded Views
P113
24A P107
P102
32A
65A
95A
P112
P113
Page 186 of 188

P114
31A
P105
26A
06A
P106 P111
31A
P104 P101
10A
P110
25A
Torque Tigtening Figures
ITEM
PUMP SIZE
ALL
P102 P103 P104 P107 P110
Nm 4 4 7 7 4
Note: Torque tolerances are +/-5% of stated nominal figures.
Section 5, Page 1
Page 187 of 188

UK and Europe
Mono Pumps Ltd, Martin Street, Audenshaw

Manchester, M34 5JA, England
T. +44 (0)161 339 9000
E. info@mono-pumps.com
Americas
Monoflo Inc., 9700 West Gulf Bank

Houston, Texas 77040, USA
T. +1 281 272 7700
E. inquire@mono o.com
Monoflo SA
Ing. Huergo 2239 - B1842GGW

Monte Grande
Buenos Aires
Argentina
T. +54 4296 8997
F. +54 4284 0323
E. inquire@monoflo.com
Australasia
Mono Pumps (Australia) Pty Ltd

Mono House, 338-348 Lower Dandenong Road
Mordialloc, Victoria 3195, Australia
T. +61 (0)3 9580 5211
E. ozsales@mono-pumps.com
Mono Pumps (New Zealand) Ltd

PO Box 71-021, Fremlin Place, Avondale
Auckland 7, New Zealand
T. +64 (0)9 829 0333
E. info@mono-pumps.co.nz
Asia
Mono Pumps Ltd, No. 500 YaGang Road

Lujia Village, Malu, Jiading District
Shanghai 201801, P.R. China
T. +86 (0)21 5915 7168
E. monoshanghai@nov.com
www.mono-pumps.com
Page 188 of 188

HT64-132 HSINC-50完工资料

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

HT64-132 HSINC-50完工资料

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Final Document

Rev: V1.4 HSINC-50

Rev: V1.4 HSINC-50

Rev: V1.4 HSINC-50

Chapter 1 Overall System Introduction 系统简介

Rev: V1.4 HSINC-50

Chapter 2 Main data and Scope of Supply 主要参数及供货范围

2.2 Burner 燃烧器(on incinerator unit 安装在焚烧炉上)

2.3 Flue gas fan 烟气风机

Rev: V1.4 HSINC-50

2.4 Flue gas damper 烟气风门

2.5 Sludge tank 污油柜

2.6 Sludge circulation pump 污油循环泵

2.7 Sludge dosing pump 污油计量泵

Rev: V1.4 HSINC-50

2.8 Electrical control panel 电控箱

2.9 Expansion Bellow 膨胀节

Rev: V1.4 HSINC-50

Chapter 3 Operator panel introductions 人机界面操作说明

3.1. General description 概述

3.3. Interface operation guidance 操作界面详细说明

3.3.1. Language selection upon power-on 上电语言选择

Rev: V1.4 HSINC-50

3.3.2. Flow diagram 流程图

Rev: V1.4 HSINC-50

Rev: V1.4 HSINC-50

Rev: V1.4 HSINC-50

3.3.3. Main manu 主菜单

3.3.4. Operation page 操作页面

Rev: V1.4 HSINC-50

Rev: V1.4 HSINC-50

Rev: V1.4 HSINC-50

Rev: V1.4 HSINC-50

3.3.5. Chart of trend 趋势图

Rev: V1.4 HSINC-50

3.3.6. Alarm page 报警页面

Rev: V1.4 HSINC-50

Rev: V1.4 HSINC-50

Rev: V1.4 HSINC-50

z Alarm contact, default as 0

Rev: V1.4 HSINC-50

Rev: V1.4 HSINC-50

Main description of data setting

Rev: V1.4 HSINC-50

Rev: V1.4 HSINC-50

Rev: V1.4 HSINC-50

Rev: V1.4 HSINC-50

3.4. Alarm 报警系统

3.4.1. General description 概述

Rev: V1.4 HSINC-50

3.4.2. Alarm list 报警内容

Rev: V1.4 HSINC-50

A/D 模块在数据转过程 A/D 模块在数据转过

Rev: V1.4 HSINC-50

Rev: V1.4 HSINC-50

Rev: V1.4 HSINC-50

3.5. Function description 功能描述

Rev: V1.4 HSINC-50

z Stand-by for follow function available

Rev: V1.4 HSINC-50

3.5.2.1. Pre-purging 前扫风

Rev: V1.4 HSINC-50

Rev: V1.4 HSINC-50

z Combustion vacuum to be adjusted to setting of post-purging vacuum (No17, default